CEAM009800

Operation & Maintenance

Manual

830B/C
850B/C
870B/C
MOTOR GRADER
830B 203163
830C 202753
850B 202575
SERIAL NUMBERS and UP
850C 202727
870B 202599
870C 202775
This material is proprietary to Komatsu America Corp. and is not to be reproduced, used, or disclosed except in accordance
with written authorization from Komatsu America Corp.

It is our policy to improve our products whenever it is possible and practical to do so. We reserve the right to make changes or
add improvements at any time without incurring any obligation to install such changes on products sold previously.

Due to this continuous program of research and development, periodic revisions may be made to this publication. It is recom-
mended that customers contact their distributor for information on the latest revision.

May 2004 Copyright 2004 Komatsu

Published in USA
Komatsu America Corp.
 EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY

EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT (APPLIES TO CANADA ONLY)

1. Products Warranted

Komatsu America International Company, Komatsu Mining Systems Inc. and Komatsu Utility Corporation (collectively “Komatsu”) produce and/or
market products under brand names of Komatsu, Dresser, Dressta, Haulpak and Galion. This emissions warranty applies to new engines bearing the
Komatsu name installed in these products and used in Canada in machines designed for industrial off-highway use. This warranty applies only to
these engines produced on or after January 1, 2000. This warranty will be administered by Komatsu distribution in Canada.

2. Coverage

Komatsu warrants to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that the engine is designed, built and equipped so as to conform, at the
time of sale by Komatsu, with all U.S. Federal emission regulations applicable at the time of manufacture and that it is free from defects in
workmanship or material which would cause it not to meet these regulations within five years or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occurs first, as
measured from the date of delivery of the engine to the ultimate purchaser.

3. Limitations

Failures, other than those resulting from defects in materials or workmanship, are not covered by this warranty. Komatsu is not responsible for
failures or damage resulting from what Komatsu determines to be abuse or neglect, including, but not limited to: operation without adequate coolant
or lubricants; over fueling; over speeding; lack of maintenance of lubricating, cooling or intake systems; improper storage, starting, warm-up, run-in
or shutdown practices; unauthorized modifications of the engine. Komatsu is also not responsible for failures caused by incorrect fuel or by water,
dirt or other contaminants in the fuel. Komatsu is not responsible for non-engine repairs, “downtime” expense, related damage, fines, all business
costs or other losses resulting from a warrantable failure.

KOMATSU IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.

This warranty, together with the express commercial warranties, are the sole warranties of Komatsu. THERE ARE NO OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OR OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

GARANTIE SUR LE CONTRÔLE DES ÉMISSIONS

ÉNONCÉ DE GARANTIE SUR LE CONTRÔLE DES ÉMISSIONS (APPLICABLE AU CANADA SEULEMENT):

1. Produits garantis:
Komatsu America International Company, Komatsu Mining Systems Inc. et Komatsu Utility Corporation (collectivement Komatsu) produisent et/ou font la
mise en marché de produits portant les noms de marque Komatsu, Dresser, Dressta, Haulpak et Galion. Cette garantie sur les émissions s’applique à tous les
nouveaux moteurs portant le nom Komatsu, installés dans ces produits et utilisés au Canada dans des machines conçues pour utilisation industrielle non-
routière. Cette garantie s’applique seulement sur les moteurs produits à partir du 1er Janvier 2000. Cette garantie sera administrée par la distribution de
Komatsu au Canada .

2. Couverture:
Komatsu garantit à l’acheteur ultime et chaque acheteur subséquent que le moteur est conçu, construit et équipé en toute conformité, au moment de la vente
par Komatsu, avec toutes les Réglementations fédérales américaines sur les émissions applicables au moment de la fabrication et qu’il est exempt de défauts
de construction ou de matériaux qui auraient pour effet de contrevenir à ces réglementations en dedans de 5 ans ou 3000 heures d’opération, mesuré à partir
de la date de livraison du moteur au client ultime.

3. Limitations:
Les bris, autres que ceux résultant de défauts de matériaux ou de construction, ne sont pas couverts par cette Garantie. Komatsu n’est pas responsable pour
bris ou dommages résultant de ce que Komatsu détermine comme étant de l’abus ou négligence, incluant mais ne se limitant pas à: l’opération sans
lubrifiants ou agent refroidissants adéquats; la suralimentation d’essence; la survitesse; le manque d’entretien des systèmes de lubrification, de
refroidissement ou d’entrée; de pratiques non-propices d’entreposage, de mise en marche, de réchauffement, de conditionnement ou d’arrêt; les
modifications non-autorisées du moteur. De plus, Komatsu n’est pas responsable de bris causés par de l’essence inadéquate ou de l’eau, des saletés ou autres
contaminants dans l’essence. Komatsu n’est pas responsable des réparations non-reliées au moteur, des dépenses encourues suite aux temps d’arrêts, des
dommages relatifs, amendes, et de tout autre coût d’affaires ou autres pertes résultant d’un bris couvert par la garantie.

KOMATSU N’EST PAS RESPONSABLE DES INCIDENTS OU DOMMAGES CONSÉQUENTS.

Cette garantie, ainsi que les garanties expresses commerciales, sont les seules garanties de Komatsu. IL N’Y A AUCUNE AUTRE
GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU SOUS -ENTENDUE, MARCHANDABLE OU PROPICE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIÈRE.

CEKQ000600 - Komatsu America International Company 12/99

 INFORMATION IMPORTANTE SUR LE MOTEUR AVERTISSEMENT
CE MOTEUR EST CONFORME AUX NORMES AMÉRICAINES DEL’EPA (ANNÉE DU DES BLESSURES PEUVENT RÉSULTER ET LA GARANTIE
MODÈLE) ET DE LA CALIFORNIE POUR LES MOTEURS LARGES NON-ROUTIERS A IGNI- S’ANNULER SI LES RPM DU TAUX D’ESSENCE OU L’ALTITUDE
TION PAR COMPRESSION. CE MOTEUR EST CERTIFIÉ POUR OPERATION À ESSENCE EXCÈDENT LES VALEURS MAXIMALES PUBLIÉES POUR CE
DIÉSEL. MODÈLE ET SON APPLICATION.

IMPORTANT ENGINE INFORMATION

MODÈLE DU MOTEUR
FAMILLE DU MOTEUR
THIS ENGINE CONFORMS TO YYYY MODEL YEAR U.S. EPA REGULATION AND THE CALIFORNIA
REGULATIONS LARGE NON ROAD COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINES. THIS ENGINE IS CERTI-
FIED TO OPERATE ON DIESEL FUEL.
WARNING NO. SÉRIE
INJURY MAY RESULT AND WARRANTY IS VOIDED IF FUEL RATE RPM OR ALTITUDES EXCEED
PUBLISHED MAXIMUM VALUES FOR THIS MODEL AND APPLICATION.
ENGINE MODEL SERIAL NO. DÉPLACEMENT

SYSTÈME DE ENGINE FAMILY DISPLACEMENT LITERS

CONTROLE DES
ÉMISSIONS D’ÉCHAPPEMENT EXHAUST EMISSION
FIRING ORDER 1-5-3-6-2-4 LITRES
CONTROL SYSTEM
ADV. LOAD OUTPUT Kw ( HP) RPM
CHARGE DE SORTIE ADV. SÉQUENCE DE MISE À FEU
VALVE LASH IN. EX. FUEL RATE mm3/STROKE mm3/BATTEMENT
PORTÉE DE VALVE À FROID COLD (mm) AT ADV.
(mm) TAUX D’ESSENCE À ADV.

VITESSE STATIQUE IDLE SPEED RPM FAMILY EMISSION LIMIT

INITIAL INJECTION DEG. BTDC DATE OF MANUFACTURE LIMITE D’ÉMISSION DE
TIMING LA FAMILLE

RÉGLAGE DE L’ALLUMAGE - _____________________________________________ KOMATSU LTD.

INJECTION INITIALE MADE IN JAPAN DATE
DE FABRICATION

DEG. BTDC
KOMATSU LTÉE
FABRIQUÉ AU JAPON

ENGINE DATAPLATE - ENGLISH / FRENCH

 PRODUCT PUBLICATIONS INFORMATION
Various product Parts and Service Publications are available to all KOMATSU construction equipment
owners, including operation and maintenance manuals, parts books and service manuals.

Special publications, such as service tool, air conditioning and turbocharger service manuals are also
available as well as selected Operation and Service manuals in foreign languages.

The Publications listed below are available for this particular machine(s).

DESCRIPTION FORM NUMBER

PARTS BOOK - PAPER:

Chassis and Engine 830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEPB002800
Chassis and Engine 850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BEPBG58612
Chassis and Engine 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .BEPBG78100

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL:

Chassis and Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CEAM009800

SHOP MANUAL
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CEBM011200
Engine 114E-2 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CEBM000601
Engine 102E-2 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SEBM010019

SAFETY MANUAL

Machine specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1085 960 R2

Parts and Service Publications can only be acquired by authorized KOMATSU distributors using the
Komatsu America Corp. Extranet Literature Ordering System.

If the Extranet Literature Ordering System is not available at the distributor location, then the following
Requisition for Technical Service Publications and Service Forms can be used. Form KDC91E is shown
on the reverse side of this page. Komatsu America Corp. reserves the right to add a surcharge to all fax
orders.

830_850_870B_C pubinfo.fm 5/21/04

 REQUISITION FOR TECHNICAL SERVICE PUBLICATIONS AND SERVICE FORMS

COMPLETE FORM DataKom Publications and Training Division

AND RETURN TO 440 North Fairway Drive
Vernon Hills, IL 60061-8112 U.S.A.
Attn: Service Publications
Fax No. (847) 970-4186
Tel No. (847) 970-5887

COMPANY NAME
SHIP TO PURCHASE ORDER NO.

ATTN.

STREET ADDRESS ORDER DATE

TYPE or PRINT
ONLY CITY, STATE, ZIP CODE

COUNTRY

PHONE NO. FAX NO. SHIPPING METHOD DISTR/BRANCH CODE

IMPORTANT - TO ASSURE SHIPMENT OF THE CORRECT PUBLICATION(S), THE MODEL NUMBER AND
MACHINE SERIAL NUMBER MUST BE SHOWN.

QTY. PUBLICATION FORM NO. PARTS BOOK PUBLICATION MODEL NUMBER SERIAL NUMBER
P-Paper DESCRIPTION
➥

M-Microfiche

KDC91E 071403 CURRENT PRICES WILL BE CHARGED

 INTRODUCTION 0

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-1

INTRODUCTION

Read all safety precautions in Section 1 before attempting to operate the machine.

GENERAL
Before the initial startup of your grader, take the time to read and under-
stand the "Operation and Maintenance Manual." The manual is stored in
the document holder (arrow), which is located to the left of the opera-
tor's seat. The manual has been prepared to help you operate and main-
tain your grader properly. After you have familiarized yourself with the
contents of this manual, retain it on the grader so that you can refer to it
when needed.

The information contained within this manual is IMPORTANT. It will

assist in ensuring that your grader gives you many hours of dependable,
economical and trouble-free service.

Some illustrations are of general application of the model and may not
show your machine accurately in all details.

Throughout this manual the use of the terms "left," "right," "front," and "rear" must be understood to avoid confusion when
following instructions. Left and right indicate the left and right sides of the machine when facing forward in the operator's seat.
Front and rear indicate the front and rear of the machine when facing the windshield in the operator's seat.

0-2 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 INTRODUCTION

Remark
The grader contains both metric and SAE fasteners.

The grader may be used for the following applications: leveling, repair and maintenance of gravel roads, road construction,
ditching, cutting bankslopes, mixing and spreading, light dozing, and snow plowing.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-3

INTRODUCTION

PIN LOCATION
The Product Identification Number (PIN) is stamped on
the right hand side of the frame. Ensure that the PIN on
the frame matches the number on the tag located on the
right side of the seat box console (arrow).

Ensure that the PIN on the frame matches the PIN on the tag located on
the right side of the seat box console (arrow).

0-4 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 INTRODUCTION

SERIAL NUMBER (S/N)

When parts are needed or corresponding with your distributor, furnish the grader MODEL and SERIAL NUMBER. Also, pro-
vide the serial numbers of the engine, transmission, or cab when servicing or discussing those items.

ENGINE S/N
Arrow indicates the location of the engine model and serial number.

TRANSMISSION S/N
Arrow indicates the location of transmission model and serial number.

CAB S/N
Arrow indicates the location of the cab ROPS/FOPS model and serial
number.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-5

INTRODUCTION

DATE RECEIVED

GRADER MODEL & P.I.N. NUMBER /

ENGINE MODEL & SERIAL NUMBER /

TRANSMISSION MODEL & SERIAL NUMBER /

REAR AXLE MODEL AND SERIAL NUMBER /

CAB ROPS/FOPS MODEL AND SERIAL NUMBER /

TIRE SIZE & PLY RATING /

OPTIONS & ACCESSORIES / /

0-6 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 INTRODUCTION

MACHINE SHIPPING

When transporting the machine, use caution when loading and unloading it. Load and unload the machine
in a level area that fully supports the machine and transport vehicle. Block the transport vehicle so it can
not move. Use loading ramps of adequate strength, low angle and proper height. Keep the trailer bed and
the machine's tires clean of clay, oil and other slippery materials. Lock the machine's frame halves
together with the frame locking bar and pins. Apply the machine's parking brake. Block the tires and
securely tie down the machine to the trailer bed.

LONG-DISTANCE SHIPPING
Certain precautions must be taken when the grader is shipped to a new location. The climatic conditions during transit and at
destination, method of transportation, and the time in transit should determine the precautions to be taken. If the grader must
be in transit for a long time or will not be used immediately upon its arrival, the same precautions should be taken for shipping
as outlined for storing. The only exception is that the battery should be disconnected.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-7

INTRODUCTION

The following precautions should suffice if the grader is in transit just a few days.

1. Increase the air pressure in the tires several pounds above normal operating pressure. This action prevents excessive
machine bouncing during transit.
2. Drain the radiator, if not protected with antifreeze.
3. Disconnect the battery.
4. Clean all bright surfaces and coat with a heavy grease to prevent rusting.
5. Cover the exhaust pipe.
6. For transporting the machine, remove the articulation hinge pin
from its storage position.

7. After removing the articulation hinge pin from its stowed position,
center the rear and front frames. Then install the hinge pin to lock
the rear and front frames together to prevent them from articulating.

8. Block the wheels. The blocks should be eight to 12 inches high and sawed to fit the tires. Place blocks at least six inches
high against the outside of each tire. Nail all blocks securely.
9. Turn the blade so that it does not extend past the width of the grader, if the blade remains attached. In such cases, lower
blade to the floor of the car or truck as this will lessen the vibration of the machine during transit. Secure the blade with tie
downs while transporting the vehicle.

0-8 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 INTRODUCTION

10. Tie the grader down with heavy gauge wire, steel straps, cables, or chains to various points on the frame.

TRUCK
Load and unload the machine on a level area that gives full support to the tractor wheels. Use ramps of adequate strength.
Keep the ramp angle low and at the proper height. Keep the trailer bed and the machine's tires clean of clay, oil, grease, and
other slippery materials. Tie the machine down securely to the trailer bed and block the tires as required by the carrier. Apply
the parking brake. Contact the local authorities for the proper shipping and loading regulations.

RAILROAD FLAT CAR

Appropriate loading rules and specifications must be followed when shipping this machine on open top railroad cars.

DRIVING
If this machine is to be driven from one job site to another, contact the local authorities for roading regulations, such as
required escorts, slow moving vehicle signs, flags, lights, etc. Stop, look, and listen before entering a highway. Stay on the
right side of the road. Slow down and signal when turning.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-9

INTRODUCTION

MOVING A DISABLED MACHINE

Towing this machine is not recommended. To move a disabled machine, use a trailer or low-boy truck if possible. If towing is
necessary, such as freeing a stuck machine, tow it only as far as necessary. Use chains or cables of adequate strength. Be sure
they are properly secured to frame.

Connect the towing line only to the rear hitch or the tie down points on the main frame. Do not use the cir-
cle tie down points.
Do not tow the grader backwards. Towing the grader backwards can result in the front axle assembly drift-
ing, due to leaning wheels, etc.
Lock the frame in the straight position using the lock pin at the articulation joint.
Do not allow an operator or passengers on the grader while towing.
Do not tow the grader more than 1 mile (1.61 km)] and at a speed no greater than 3 MPH (4.83 km/h) while
the drive shaft is connected. If the drive shaft is disconnected, the grader can then be towed distances
greater than 1 mile (1.61 km) and at a speed not to exceed 10 MPH (16.09 km/h).
A tow bar is recommended to be used if the grader is towed more than a distance of 50 ft. (15.24 m). If a tow
bar is unavailable and a tow line is used, a machine of equal or greater size should be attached to the rear
of the towed machine to provide for braking when towing downhill. Also, if a towing line is used, shielding
is to be provided on both the towing and the towed machines to protect the operator in case of line or
cable breakage.
Ensure that the parking brake is released before towing. Always prevent the grader from moving by block-
ing the fore and aft of the wheels when releasing the parking brake.

METHODS OF TOWING
When grader must be towed, there are three methods of towing. These methods depend upon the following combination of
conditions:

1. Condition One - Engine operative, all hydraulics operative, except transmission and/or final drive.
2. Condition Two - Engine inoperative, parking brake caliper is able to be released by using a port-a-power and/or some
other auxiliary pumping device.

Remark
A charged accumulator will also release the caliper. Turn the ignition key to the ON position and then the park-
ing brake switch to activate the caliper.

3. Condition Three - Engine inoperative, parking brake unable to be released by port-a-power and/or some other auxiliary
pump.

0-10 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 INTRODUCTION

METHOD ONE
Use the following towing procedure when the engine and all hydraulic systems are operative, except the transmission and/or
final drive.

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Place blocks in front of and behind each tire to prevent movement of the grader when the parking brake is RELEASED.
3. Attach the tow bar, towing cables, or chains to the tie down points of main frame.
4. Disconnect the drive shaft companion flange at the rear axle and transmission.
5. Start the engine and RELEASE the parking brake.
6. With the parking brake RELEASED, turn the parking brake
release valve (1) fully CW to close it and hold caliper in the
RELEASED position.
7. With the caliper RELEASED, turn off the engine.
8. With towing vehicle, take the slack out of the towing cables or
chains before removing the blocks.

Use extreme care when removing the blocks from in front of and behind each tire. The grader may move
when the blocks are removed.

9. Remove the blocks from in front of and behind each tire.

10. Begin to tow the grader.
11. Once the grader is finished being towed, be sure the engine is OFF. Apply the parking brake by opening the brake release
valve.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-11

INTRODUCTION

METHOD TWO
Use the following towing procedure when the engine is inoperative, and to release the parking brake caliper requires a
port-a-power and/or some other auxiliary pumping device.

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Place blocks in front of and behind each tire to prevent movement of the grader when the parking brake is RELEASED.
3. Attach the tow bar, towing cables or chains to tie down points of the main frame.
4. Disconnect the drive shaft companion flange at rear axle and transmission.
5. Turn the parking brake release valve (item 1 in figure on the previous page) fully CW to close it.
6. Attach a port-a-power of other auxiliary pumping device, to the quick-connect fitting (item 2 in the figure on preceeding
page). Pump the hydraulic fluid into system through the quick-connect fitting until the caliper releases. Once the caliper is
released, remove the port-a-power or pumping device.
7. With the towing vehicle, take the slack out of the towing cables or chains before removing the blocks.

Use extreme care when removing the blocks from in front of and behind each tire. The grader may move
when the blocks are removed.

8. Use extreme care when removing the blocks from in front of and behind each tire. Grader may move when blocks are
removed.
9. Remove the blocks from in front of and behind each tire.
10. Begin to tow the grader.
11. Once the grader is finished being towed, be sure the engine is OFF. Apply the parking brake by opening the brake release
valve.

METHOD THREE
Use the following towing procedure when the engine is inoperative and the caliper is unable to be released hydraulically.

1. The parking brake must be set.

2. Place blocks in front of and behind each tire to prevent movement of grader when parking brake is RELEASED.
3. Attach the tow bar, towing cables or chains to tie down points of main frame.
4. Disconnect the drive shaft companion flange at the rear axle and transmission.
5. Loosen the hex nut (1) and turn the adjustment set screw (2) coun-
terclockwise (OUT) until the brake pads (3 and 4) are clear of the
brake disc.
6. With towing vehicle, take the slack out of the towing cables or
chains before removing blocks.

0-12 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 INTRODUCTION

MACHINE STORAGE

PREPARING FOR STORAGE

When a machine is taken out of service and stored for a time exceeding 30 days, steps must be taken to protect the machine.
Leaving the equipment outdoors exposed to the elements will materially shorten its life.

An enclosure will protect the machine from rapid temperature changes and lessen the amount of condensation that forms in
hydraulic components, engine, fuel tank, and axles. If it is not possible to put the machine in an enclosure, cover it with a tar-
paulin.

Check that the storage site is not subject to flooding or other natural disasters.

After the machine has been positioned for storage and the engine shut down, perform the following operations:

1. Visually inspect the machine for external leakage and other defects. Correct as necessary.
2. Thoroughly clean the machine, be sure to rinse off any caustic residue.
3. Touch up painted areas where the paint has been scraped.
4. Correct any defects found. Consult your distributor.
5. Clean or replace the air cleaner filter elements. Refer to the “Engine Air Intake System” Section 3, of this manual.
6. Clean the radiator, refer to the “Engine Cooling System” Section 3, of this manual.
7. The cooling system should be completely drained, chemically flushed, and refilled with a conditioned water/antifreeze
solution suitable for the lowest temperature anticipated. Refer to the “Engine Cooling System” Section 3, in this manual
for the proper antifreeze and conditioner concentrations. After refilling the system, always operate the engine until the
thermostat opens to circulate the solution through the cooling system.

Remark
To avoid corrosion, under no circumstances should the vehicle be stored with a dry cooling system.

8. Drain the water from the fuel tank. Refer to the “Engine Fuel System” Section 3, of this manual.
9. Clean the fuel strainer (if equipped). Refer to the “Engine Fuel System” Section 3, of this manual.
10. Remove, empty, and reinstall the primary and final fuel filters. Refer to “Engine Fuel System” Section 3, of this manual.
11. Pump 2 U.S. gallons (7.6 liters) of approved diesel fuel into the fuel tank. Refer to “Engine Fuel System” Section 3, of this
manual. Add about 2 Fl. Oz. (59 ml) of a fuel stabilizer to the diesel fuel. The stabilizer will prevent the degrading of the
fuel, sludge buildup, and stops the growth of bacteria in the fuel during storage. The fuel stabilizer may be purchased
from:

FUEL PREP 1000

PENRAY COMPANY
WHEELING, ILLINOIS 60090

phone number 800.373.6729

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-13

INTRODUCTION

Corrosion inhibitors are volatile and flammable. Use the inhibitors only in a well-ventilated area. Keep
flames away and do not SMOKE near the inhibitors. Store the container in a cool, well-ventilated place.

12. Add 1.5 Fl. Oz. (44 ml) of volatile corrosion inhibitor (VCI) for each 10 U.S. gallons (38 liters) of total fuel capacity to
the fuel tank. [Example: If the total fuel tank capacity is 100 U.S. gallons (379 liters), pour 15 Fl. Oz. (444 ml) of “VCI”
into the fuel tank.] The VCI provides corrosion protection by contact with the metal, and in a closed system, the vapors
provide sufficient protection for areas that are not in contact with the oil. The VCI may be purchased from:
NOX RUST VCI #105 OIL
DAUBERT CHEMICAL COMPANY
4700 S. CENTRAL AVE.
CHICAGO, IL 60638

phone number 708.496.7350

Due to the volatile nature of VCI, irritation of the eyes and skin may occur. Avoid prolonged exposure to the
vapors or oil.

13. With the correct amount of diesel fuel stabilizer and “VCI” poured into the fuel tank, add an additional 10 U.S. gallons (38
liters) of approved diesel fuel to the mixture. This step will bring the total amount of diesel fuel in the tank to 12 U.S. gal-
lons (45.4 liters).
14. Vent and prime the fuel system. Refer to the “Engine Fuel System” Section 3, of this manual.
15. Start the engine and run it from 1400 to 1600 RPM, no load, for about 4 minutes.
16. Prepare the engine for storage as outlined in the “Engine Service Manual.”
17. Lubricate all points of the machine as outlined in the “Lubrication Chart and Table” Section 3, of this manual.

Remark
Be sure to oil or grease all linkage connections, joints, nuts, pins, shafts and bushings not covered on the
“Lubrication Chart and Table.”

18. Seal all external openings (i.e. engine exhaust outlet, crankcase and hydraulic breather, fuel vent line, etc.) with tape wide
enough to cover the opening, regardless of size.

Remark
When sealing with tape, be sure to extend the tape about one inch (25 mm) beyond the opening to ensure a
good seal.

19. Add 12 Fl. Oz. (355 ml) of type 1 oil to the hydraulic reservoir. Also add 4 Fl. Oz. (118 ml) of type 1 oil to the WET air
tank reservoir (if equipped).
20. If it is desirable to leave the tires on the machine, jack the machine up and place it on blocks, leaving the tires in suspen-
sion. Deflate the tires and cover them.

0-14 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 INTRODUCTION

Use extra caution when jacking up the machine. Jacking up the machine can be hazardous if performed
improperly. Use jacking equipment of sufficient capacity. Be sure the jacking points are strong enough to
support the machine. Be sure the jack is stable and well supported. Before jacking up the machine, block
the tires which will not be lifted. Lock the frame halves together with the locking bar and pins. If the rear
tires are being lifted, block the rear axle to prevent it from pivoting unexpectedly. Do not run the engine
with the machine on jacks. For your safety, transfer the weight of the machine to the approved blocks,
before servicing the machine.

21. Remove the seat cushions and other perishable items from the machine and store them where they will not be damaged.
22. Remove the batteries and store them in a cool (temperature between 32° F and 70° F (0° C to 21° C)), clean, dry, well-ven-
tilated place. Ensure that the batteries are away from areas storing or dispensing fuel and oil, and not near any heat source.
Be sure the batteries are fully charged.

Before connecting or disconnecting the batteries, ensure the electrical system master switch, if equipped,
is off to minimize the chance of sparks and explosion.
Do not charge the batteries in an enclosed area because hydrogen gas is given off during the charging
process. An accumulation of this gas could cause an explosion, if ignited.

Remark
If the machine is stored with dry charged batteries or no batteries, the alternator output lead must be discon-
nected and insulated. Failure to do so may result in permanent alternator damage. Connect the output lead
only after the batteries have been activated with electrolyte.

23. Coat all machined, unpainted surfaces (including the blade) with chassis grease to prevent rust.

SERVICING MACHINE DURING STORAGE

ONE-MONTH REPETITIVE SERVICE PERIOD
1. Be sure batteries are fully charged. Never allow the batteries to run down below 3/4 full charge.
2. Refer to the “Engine Service Manual” for maintenance of the engine during storage.

SIX-MONTH REPETITIVE SERVICE PERIOD

1. Visually inspect the engine and radiator for leakage and other defects. Correct all defects, consult your distributor.
2. Remove all seals from the machine (crankcase and hydraulic breathers, air intake, fuel tank vent lines, etc.).
3. Install the fully charged batteries. Refer to the “Electrical System” Section 3, of this manual.

Remark
Check that the batteries are level in the holders and securely fastened in place. The hold-down fasteners
should hold the batteries firmly but not so tight that the hold-down bar or batteries warp. The battery cable
clamps should be arranged in a way so they do not chafe against the hold-down bar or the fasteners to mini-
mize chances of sparks and possible explosion. Always connect the ground cable last.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-15

INTRODUCTION

4. Check the coolant level in the radiator and add proper concentrations of antifreeze and coolant conditioners, if required. If
excessive loss of coolant is detected, the problem should be corrected. Refer to “Engine Cooling System” Section 3.
5. Perform steps 8 through 22 of “Preparing For Storage.”

PREPARING FOR OPERATION

1. Visually inspect the machine for external leakage and other defects. Correct as necessary.\
2. Thoroughly clean the machine, be sure to rinse off any caustic residue.
3. Correct any defects found. Consult your distributor.
4. Remove all seals from the machine (i.e. crankcase and hydraulic breathers, precleaner hood, fuel tank vent lines, etc.).
5. Replace the air cleaner filter elements. Refer to the “Engine Air Intake System” Section 3, of this manual.
6. Remove and discard fuel filters and replace with new. Refer to “Engine Fuel System” Section 3, of this manual.
7. Fill the fuel tank with approved diesel fuel. Refer to the “Engine Fuel System” Section 3, of this manual.
8. Lubricate all points of the machine as outlined in the “Lubrication Chart and Table” Section 3, of this manual.

Remark
Be sure to oil or grease all linkage connections, joints, nuts, pins, shafts and bushings not covered on the “Peri-
odic Service Chart and Table” Section 3, of this manual.

9. Drain the engine oil from the crankcase and replace the engine lubricating oil filters. Refer to the”Engine Lubricating Oil
System” Section 3, of this manual.
10. Install the fully charged batteries. Refer to the “Electrical System” Section 3, of this manual.
11. Start the engine, refer to the “Engine Starting” Section 3, of this manual. Observe all the gauges on the instrument panel
for proper operation.

Never start the engine indoors unless proper exhaust ventilation is provided to remove deadly exhaust
gases. Once the engine is operating, move the machine outdoors as soon as possible. Exhaust gases are
dangerous and can cause unconsciousness and death.

12. Clean the radiator, refer to “Engine Cooling System” Section 3, of this manual.
13. Perform an engine diagnostic test. Consult your distributor.

ROLLOVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE (ROPS)

Periodically inspect the R.O.P.S. for fatigue cracks. Cracks indicate a weakened structure, which should be
replaced for your protection.
This machine is assembled using high strength fasteners. Replacement fasteners must be of the same
size and strength as the originals. Do not substitute. Refer to the parts catalog for this machine. Tighten
the fasteners to the proper torque. Refer to Section 4.

0-16 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 INTRODUCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION

GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2
PIN LOCATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4
SERIAL NUMBER (S/N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
ENGINE S/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
TRANSMISSION S/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
CAB S/N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
MACHINE SHIPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7
LONG-DISTANCE SHIPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-7
TRUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
RAILROAD FLAT CAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
DRIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
MOVING A DISABLED MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10
METHODS OF TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-10
METHOD ONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-11
METHOD TWO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-12
METHOD THREE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-12
MACHINE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-13
PREPARING FOR STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-13
SERVICING MACHINE DURING STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-15
ONE-MONTH REPETITIVE SERVICE PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-15
SIX-MONTH REPETITIVE SERVICE PERIOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-15
PREPARING FOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-16
ROLLOVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE (ROPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-16
TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-17

SAFETY

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

SAFETY RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
CLOTHING AND PROTECTIVE ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
FIRE PREVENTION FOR FUEL AND OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
ENTERING OR LEAVING THE CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
WHILE IN THE CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
PREVENTING CRUSHING OR CUTTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
ASBESTOS DUST HAZARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND FIRST AID KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
HIGH-TEMPERATURE HANDLING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
TO PREVENT HOT WATER FROM SPURTING OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
TO PREVENT HOT OIL FROM SPURTING OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
ROPS PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
OPTIONAL ATTACHMENTS PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING ACCUMULATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
OPERATIONAL SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-17

INTRODUCTION
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
FIRE PREVENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
OPERATOR’S CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
VENTILATION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
LIGHTS, MIRROR, WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
BEFORE AND AFTER STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
DURING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
DRIVING ON SLOPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
BACKING UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
ARTICULATION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
ROADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
LIMITED VISIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER LINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
SNOW SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
COLD TEMPERATURE PRECAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
PARKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
TRANSPORTING THE GRADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
LOADING AND UNLOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
SHIPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
PREVENTING BATTERY HAZARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
JUMP STARTING WITH BOOSTER CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
BATTERY CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
HANDLING TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
STORING TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
BEFORE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
MACHINE FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
WARNING TAGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
REPLACE SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
CLEAN BEFORE INSPECTION OR MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
LIGHT UP THE WORK AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
STOP THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
KEEP IT CLEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
WHEN WORKING WITH OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
FIRE PREVENTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
DURING MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
PERSONNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
ATTACHMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
WORKING UNDER THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
DROPPING NUTS, BOLTS, OR TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
GETTING HAMMERED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
WELDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
PROBLEM FOUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
0-18 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C
 INTRODUCTION
FLUID SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
AS THE FAN BLADES TURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
RAISED CHASSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
HIGH-PRESSURE SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
HOT OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
AFTER MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
WASTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
PROTECTING CHROME-PLATED CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
SAFETY LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
POSITION OF SAFETY LABELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
SAFETY LABELS IDENTIFIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30

OPERATION

UNIVERSAL SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

PREPARATION FOR USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
OPERATIONAL CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
OPERATOR'S CAB AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
BEACON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
CAB DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
LOWER OPENING FRONT CAB WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
STEERING WHEEL TILT KNOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
TURN SIGNAL LEVER, HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
HEADLIGHT DIMMER BUTTON, AND HORN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
CONTROL LEVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
LEFT-HAND CONTROL LEVER BANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
RIGHT-HAND CONTROL LEVER BANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
FOOT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
SHIFT CONSOLE AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
TRANSMISSION GEAR RANGE LEVER AND ENGINE SPEED CONTROL LEVER . . 2-18
SHIFT CONSOLE CONTROL PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
STEERING CONSOLE CONTROLS AND GAUGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
OPERATOR’S SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
RIDGED SEAT (STANDARD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
SEAT BELT (NONRETRACTABLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
SUSPENSION SEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
SEAT BELT (RETRACTABLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
SUN SHADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
DOME LIGHTS AND FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
FRONT DOME LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
FRONT AND REAR FANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE CONTROL MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
INTERACTING CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
MISCELLANEOUS GAUGES AND VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-19

INTRODUCTION
HYDRAULIC OIL TANK GAUGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
PARKING BRAKE RELEASE VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
FUEL TANK SHUTOFF VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
FUEL TANK DRAIN VALVE AND PLUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
ACCESS COVERS, HOOD SIDES, AND tool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
FUEL AND HYDRAULIC OIL ACCESS COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
ENGINE COOLANT ACCESS COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
ENGINE HOOD SIDE DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
TOOL BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
PUSH STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
TOWING A GRADER WITH AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
MOUNTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
STARTING PROCEDURE AFTER EXTENDED SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
PREPARATION FOR ROADING OR JOB SITE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
ROADING CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
PREPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
CRANKING METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
NORMAL START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
COLD WEATHER START USING ETHER INJECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
ENGINE WARM-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
ENGINE WARMED-UP AND RUNNING ABOVE IDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
PUTTING THE GRADER IN MOTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
EMERGENCY STOPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
PRIMARY AND SECONDARY EMERGENCY STOPPING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
PARKING THE GRADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
TURNING THE ENGINE OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
AFTER TURNING THE ENGINE OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
CHASSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69
U-PATTERN GEAR SHIFTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70
ERROR CODE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71
EXTREME OPERATING CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
EXTREME COLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
EXTREME HEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
EXTREMELY DUSTY/SANDY AREAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
EXTREME HUMIDITY/RAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
EXTREME ALTITUDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
AREAS WITH SALT WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
LEANING WHEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
LEANING WHEELS ASSIST STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
SURFACE WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
0-20 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C
 INTRODUCTION
ARTICULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76
ARTICULATION ASSISTS STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
BLADE SUSPENSION OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
SADDLE PIN INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
RECOMMENDATION FOR 45° EXTENDED REACH RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
RECOMMENDATION FOR 90° BANKSLOPE RIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
RECOMMENDATION FOR 45° EXTENDED REACH LEFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
RECOMMENDATION FOR 90° BANKSLOPE LEFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
CIRCLE DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
BLADE ANGLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
BLADE PITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-83
DITCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
MARKING CUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
ADDITIONAL PASSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
CASTING WINDROWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
BANK SLOPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
FINISHING THE INSIDE SLOPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85
CUTTING THE FLAT BOTTOM DITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
MOVING WINDROW FROM THE SHOULDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86
SNOW REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
ICE REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
MASTER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
DURING MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
PERIODIC LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
PERIODIC SERVICE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
PERIODIC SERVICE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
EACH SHIFT/10 HOUR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
DRAWBAR BALL STUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
CIRCLE SIDE SHIFT CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
BLADE PITCH CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
BLADE PIVOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
LIFT CYLINDER CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
OIL LEVEL, TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
OIL FILL, TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
OIL LEVEL, HYDRAULIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
OIL FILL, HYDRAULIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
BLADE SLIDE RAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
COOLANT LEVEL, ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
COOLANT FILL, ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
FUEL FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
FUEL-WATER TRAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-21

INTRODUCTION
OIL LEVEL, ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
AIR CLEANER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
FILTER, AIR — S/N 210568 AND UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
FILTER, AIR — S/N 210567 AND DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
FILTER, AIR — ELEMENT CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
ENGINE FAN BLADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
ENGINE DRIVE BELT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
BELT TENSION, A/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
BELT TENSION, DIFFERENTIAL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
BELT TENSION, DIFFERENTIAL PUMP — ALTERNATE METHOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
BELT TENSION, KOMATSU S6D114E-1 AND S6D102E-1 ENGINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
20 HOUR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
FILTER, TRANSMISSION OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
WEEKLY/50 HOUR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
SCARIFIER CYLINDERS AND PIVOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
LOCK PIN CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
CIRCLE AND SHOES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
LEANING WHEEL CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
TIE ROD AND LEANING WHEEL ROD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
UPPER AND LOWER STEERING YOKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
FRONT AXLE PIVOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
STEERING CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
LIFT CYLINDER TRUNNIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
LIFT CYLINDER TRUNNION SHAFTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
DOZER BLADE CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
RIPPER CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
OIL LEVEL, TANDEM CASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
OIL FILL, TANDEM CASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
OIL LEVEL, FRONT WHEEL GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
CONTROL LEVER LINKAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
CONTROL VALVE LINKAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
FILTER, HYDRAULIC OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
OIL LEVEL, CIRCLE DRIVE GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
OIL FILL, CIRCLE DRIVE GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
PARKING BRAKE CALIPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
OIL LEVEL AND FILL, CIRCLE SLIP CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
OIL LEVEL, REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
OIL FILL, REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
BREATHER, TANDEM CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
DRAIN, FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
FILTER, DIFFERENTIAL OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
100 HOUR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
OIL CHANGE, REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
MONTHLY/250 HOUR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
ARTICULATION JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
SUSPENSION ARM PIVOTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
COOLANT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
REAR AXLE PIVOTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
0-22 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C
 INTRODUCTION
FILTER, TRANSMISSION OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
BREATHER, TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
BREATHER, CIRCLE DRIVE GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
FILTER, COOLANT CORROSION RESISTOR (S6D114E-1 ENGINE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
AIR CLEANER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
BALL JOINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
3 MONTHS/250 HOUR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
OIL CHANGE, ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
FILTER, ENGINE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
3 MONTHS/500 HOUR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
COOLANT FILL, ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
FILTER, ALL- WHEEL-DRIVE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
OIL CHANGE, FRONT-WHEEL-DRIVE GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
FILTER, FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
FILTER, FUEL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
BRAKE LININGS AND ADJUSTMENT, PARKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
BRAKE LININGS, INTERNAL WET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
CHAIN, TANDEM CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
HYDRAULIC ACCUMULATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
6 MONTHS/1,000 HOUR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
FILTER, HYDRAULIC OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
OIL CHANGE, TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
BREATHER, TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
FILTER, DIFFERENTIAL OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
ENGINE ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
YEARLY/2,000 HOUR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
OIL CHANGE, CIRCLE-DRIVE GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
OIL CHANGE, CIRCLE-SLIP CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
OIL CHANGE, REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
STRAINER, DIFFERENTIAL OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
DRAIN, HYDRAULIC OIL TANK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
OIL CHANGE, TANDEM CASES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
BREATHERS, FRONT-WHEEL-DRIVE GEAR CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
DRAIN, ENGINE COOLANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
TORQUE CONVERTER OIL COOLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
STRAINERS AND FILTER, HYDRAULIC OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
BIENNIAL/2,000 HOUR SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
ENGINE VIBRATION DAMPER (S6D114E-1 ENGINE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
NOT SPECIFIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
FILTER, FRESH AIR INTAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
FILTER, CAB RECIRCULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
BREATHER, REAR AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
REPLACE THE CUTTING EDGES, REVERSE THE END BITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
WEAR LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
FUEL, COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS ACCORDING TO AMBIENT TEMPERATURE . . . . . 3-62
830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-23
INTRODUCTION
PROPER SELECTION OF FUEL, COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
NORMAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
ARCTIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
OIL CHANGE RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
TRANSMISSION, TORQUE CONVERTER AND OIL COOLER, TANDEM DRIVE CASES,
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE GEAR CASE, IF EQUIPPED AND HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
OIL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
REAR DRIVE AXLE/CIRCLE DRIVE BRAKE HOUSING OIL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . 3-65
DIESEL FUEL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
COOLANT SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
ANTIFREEZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
SUPPLEMENTAL COOLANT ADDITIVES (S6D114E-1 ENGINE ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-68
CIRCLE DRIVE GEAR CASE OIL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
FUEL SYSTEM PRIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
ENGINE CRANKCASE VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
LOCATION ON THE KOMATSU S6D102E-1 DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
LOCATION ON THE KOMATSU S6D114E-1 DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
RELATING TO THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
MAINTENANCE-FREE PLUS BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
BATTERY SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-76
GENERAL BATTERY MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
CLEANING THE BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
TESTING MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
BATTERY CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
GENERAL CHARGING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-79
SLOW CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
FAST CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
AFTER CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80
SPEEDOMETER CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
TREAD DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
NON-ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE FRONT AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE (AWD) FRONT AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-82
RIM CENTERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83
TIRE INFLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-84
TIRE INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
TIRE MATCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
TIRE SIZES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-85
TURBOCHARGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-86
GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
BOLT IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
SAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
METRIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
0-24 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C
 INTRODUCTION
BOLT DIAMETER AND TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
SAE BOLT TORQUE — GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-88
METRIC BOLT TORQUE — GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
PHOSPHATE-COATED HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
TORQUE VALUES FOR HOSE CLAMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
TORQUE VALUES FOR SPLIT FLANGE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-90
TORQUE VALUES FOR HYDRAULIC TUBES AND FITTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
SPECIFIC BOLT TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
RIM TO WHEEL NUTS — FRONT AXLE ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
NON-AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
AWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
RIM TO WHEEL NUTS — REAR AXLE ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
WHEEL TO AXLE NUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92
FRONT AXLE TO FRAME PIVOT PIN CAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
PLANETARY CARRIER — AWD FRONT AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
TIE ROD END NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
STEERING CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
ROD END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
BASE END . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
STEERING YOKE TO AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
LEANING WHEEL CYLINDER AND TIE BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
DRAWBAR TO FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
CIRCLE SHOE BOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
UPPER SLIDE WEAR-PAD BOLTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
BLADE-SHIFT CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
LIFT CYLINDER TO YOKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
YOKE TO SUSPENSION ARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
LOCK PIN CYLINDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
SUSPENSION ARM TO FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
SUSPENSION ARM TO LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
BLADE PIVOT LOCKNUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
BLADE PITCH PIVOT BOLT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
ARTICULATION CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
ARTICULATION JOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
CAB MOUNTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
REAR AXLE TO FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
BEARING HOUSING TO TANDEM CASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
TANDEM CASE TO AXLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
DRIVE SHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
S/N 203543 AND UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-100
PARKING BRAKE DISC TO FINAL DRIVE INPUT YOKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
PARKING BRAKE CALIPER TO MOUNTING BRACKET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
REAR TRANSMISSION SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
TRANSMISSION SUPPORT-TO-FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
TRANSMISSION SUPPORT-TO-TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
FRONT ENGINE SUPPORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
ENGINE SUPPORT-TO-FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-25
INTRODUCTION
ENGINE SUPPORT-TO-ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102
ALTERNATOR PULLEY NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-102

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

RIGHT HAND BIAS BLADE SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
RIGHT HAND AND LEFT HAND BIAS BLADE SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
KOMATSU S6D102E-1, 830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
KOMATSU S6D114E-1, 850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
KOMATSU S6D114E-1, 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
TRANSMISSION AND TORQUE CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
TRAVEL SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
BLADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
BLADE RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
CIRCLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
DRAWBAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
OPERATOR’S COMPARTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
AXLE, FRONT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
AXLE, REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
TANDEM DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
WHEELS, FRONT AND REAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
ALL WHEEL DRIVE - OPTIONAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
INSTRUMENTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
OPERATING WEIGHTS - APPROXIMATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
830, 850 AND 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

ALL WHEEL DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

AWD OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
OPERATIONAL CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
STARTING RECEPTACLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
COLD-WEATHER STARTING AID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
ETHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
TROUBLESHOOTING THE ETHER SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
0-26 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C
 INTRODUCTION
FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
HYDRAULIC ACCUMULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
DOZER BLADE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
CHANGING THE CUTTING EDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
SCARIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
SCARIFIER SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
SCARIFIER TOOTH REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
SCARIFIER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
RIPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
RIPPER OR SCARIFIER SHANKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
USING SCARIFIER SHANKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
USING RIPPER SHANKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
SHANK INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
RIPPER TOOTH REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
RIPPER WITH HITCH PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
RIPPER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
AM/FM/WB STEREO RADIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
CONTROLS IDENTIFIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
CONTROLS DEFINED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
SETTING THE CLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 0-27

INTRODUCTION

0-28 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 1SAFETY
WARNING!
Read and follow all safety precautions. Failure to do so may
result in serious injury or death.
This safety section also contains precautions for optional
equipment and attachments.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-1

SAFETY

The warning symbol, an exclamation point inside a triangle, is used throughout this manual to call your
attention to matters concerning personal safety. Observe and follow these warnings. Be certain anyone
operating or servicing this machine is aware of these rules. Failure to follow these rules may result in
injury or death.

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY RULES
BEFORE STARTING THE UNIT, READ AND UNDERSTAND THE “OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”
THOROUGHLY. COMPLY WITH ALL MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS FOR PROPER MACHINE
OPERATION.
• ONLY trained and authorized personnel should be allowed to operate and service this machine.
• Follow all safety rules, precautions and instructions when operating or performing maintenance on the machine.
• The owner and/or operator must replace any and all safety and warning product graphics if they are worn or removed from
the machine.
• Think before you act. Careful operators and service personnel are the best insurance against accidents.
• Do not rush. Hurrying can lead to accidents. Haste, carelessness and lack of training are the primary causes of equipment-
related injuries.
• The operator must be alert, physically fit and free from the influences of alcohol, drugs and medications that might affect
his eyesight, hearing or reactions.
• Safety must always be the operator's most important concern. He must refuse to operate when he knows it is unsafe and
consult his supervisor when safety is in doubt.
• When working with another operator or a person on work site traffic duty, be sure all personnel understand all hand sig-
nals that are to be used.
• KNOW your work area. Use extra caution on uneven terrain.
• WALK around the machine to check the condition of the machine before beginning the work.
• MAKE SURE the grader is operating properly and in good repair.
• IF a machine is unsafe or being repaired, do not operate it. Attach a warning tag.
• TEST all controls, the brakes, and steering before starting work. Adjust the brakes as needed.
• DO NOT carry personnel.
• USE the proper fueling procedures.
• Before starting the grader and while remaining seated, ensure that ALL controls are in neutral, that the parking brake is
set, that the blade is lowered to the ground, and that the wheels are blocked when parking on an incline. Sound the horn.
• ALWAYS remove the key when leaving the grader.
• Before backing up, always look and use a back-up alarm or signalman.
• NEVER coast downhill in neutral. Always maintain control of the grader. Do not ride the brakes.
• BE AWARE of the existing traffic pattern.
• DO NOT GUESS, know the total weight of the grader and the dimensions for operation.
• USE LIGHTS and directional signals when applicable.
• NEVER allow grease or other debris to gather on the operator's platform. KEEP the grader clean. KEEP the floor free of
tools, etc.

1-2 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

• NEVER repair or service the grader when it is in motion. ALWAYS block the wheels before repairing or servicing it.
• BE AWARE of all moving parts.
• MAKE SURE all Safety/Caution decals are always readable.
• AFFIX an OSHA AND/OR ISO “Slow Moving Vehicle” emblem to the machine.
• NO MODIFICATIONS OR ADDITIONS that affect the capacity or safe operation of the equipment shall be made,
without the Manufacturer's WRITTEN approval.
• BEFORE leaving the grader:
• Lower the blade and other work attachments to the ground. However, if the blade or work equipment must be in the
raised position for servicing, support the blade or work equipment with the appropriate blocks.
• Set the Park Brake Switch to the APPLIED position.
• Lock the Gear Range Lever in NEUTRAL or PARK position.
• Turn off the engine and remove the ignition key.
• Raise the steering column to allow adequate room when leaving the operator’s seat.
• NEVER get out of the cab while the engine is running.
• ALWAYS, stop the engine, and lock the control levers before leaving the operator's seat.

SAFETY FEATURES
• Be sure all guards and covers are in their proper position. Be sure to replace them after servicing the machine. Have
guards and covers repaired immediately if damaged. Perform a WALK-AROUND CHECK.
• Use safety features such as safety lock lever and seat belt properly.
• DO NOT operate this machine without wearing a seat belt. Adjust the seat belt before operation.
• NEVER remove any safety features. ALWAYS keep them in good operating condition. Improper use of safety features
could result in serious bodily injury or death.
• Be sure the machine has the correct equipment required by local rules and regulations.
• Test the backup alarm before moving the grader. The alarm only sounds when the grader is in reverse and the key on.

CLOTHING AND PROTECTIVE ITEMS

• DO NOT wear loose clothing, jewelry, or loose long hair. They can catch on controls or in moving parts and cause serious
injury or death.
• DO NOT not wear oil-soaked clothes, because they are flammable.
• Wear a hard hat, safety glasses, safety shoes, mask or gloves when operating or maintaining the machine. Always wear
safety goggles, hard hat and heavy gloves if your job involves scattering metal chips or minute materials - this is particu-
larly important when driving pins with a hammer and when cleaning the air cleaner element with compressed air. Also
check that there are no other personnel near the machine.
• Check that all protective equipment functions properly before using.

FIRE PREVENTION FOR FUEL AND OIL

Fuel, oil, and antifreeze can be ignited by a flame. Fuel is particularly FLAMMABLE and can be HAZARDOUS.
• Keep any flame away from flammable fluids.
• Stop the engine and do not smoke when refueling.
• Tighten all fuel and oil caps securely.
• Refueling and oiling should be made in well ventilated areas.
• Keep oil and fuel in the determined place and do not allow unauthorized persons to enter.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-3

SAFETY

ENTERING OR LEAVING THE CAB

• DO NOT jump off or climb onto the machine.
• Before entering the cab, walk around the machine and clear the area of personnel and obstructions.
• Prior to exiting the cab, rotate the circle to allow access to the left hand steps.
• When entering or leaving the cab, always face the machine while maintaining a three-point stance (see photos below).

• If you want to bring your lunch box or another item into the cab with you, place the item inside and on the cab floor before
using the three-point entry method. When exiting the cab, leave the item on the cab floor and retrieve the item after exiting
the cab using the three-point stance.
• DO NOT use the machine's controls or hoses as handrails when climbing on or off the machine. Controls and hoses can
move and do not provide solid support. Movement of the controls may cause unexpected machine movement and injury.
• REMOVE any oil or mud from the handrails and steps. If they are damaged, repair them. Tighten any loose hardware.
• DO NOT leave any tools or parts lying around the operator’s compartment, especially on the floor.
• NEVER BRING dangerous objects — flammable items or explosive devices — into the cab.

WHILE IN THE CAB

NEVER USE a cellular telephone while driving or operating the grader.

1-4 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

PREVENTING CRUSHING OR CUTTING

• Do not enter, or put your hand or arm or any other part of your body
between movable parts such as between the work equipment and
cylinders, or between the machine and work equipment. If the work
equipment is operated, the clearance will change and this may lead
to serious damage or personal injury.

ASBESTOS DUST HAZARD

Asbestos dust can be HAZARDOUS to your health if it is inhaled.
If you handle materials containing asbestos fibers. follow these guidelines as given below:
• NEVER use compressed air for cleaning.
• Use water for cleaning to keep down the dust.
• Operate the machine with the wind to your back, whenever possible.
• Use an approved respirator if necessary.

FIRE EXTINGUISHER AND FIRST AID KIT

• Be sure fire extinguishers have been provided. The fire extinguisher
should be secured, with a mounting bracket, inside the cab near the
operator’s seat. This fire extinguisher is in accordance with the
National fire Protection Association for portable fire extinguishers,
NFPA No. 10. This fire extinguisher also meets DOT requirements
to 525 PSI (37 kg/cm²).

Inspect the fire extinguisher monthly and record when it was

inspected. Observe the charge indicator to determine if the extin-
guisher is in need of a recharge. Or, weigh the extinguisher. A fire
extinguisher that weighs less than 9 lbs and 0 ozs. needs a recharge.
Have a qualified technician recharge the fire extinguisher.

To operate the fire extinguisher, hold it upright and pull the pin.
Press the lever while pointing the nozzle to the base of the flame.
Move the nozzle in a side to side motion.

Remark
After using the fire extinguisher, have a qualified technician recharge the extinguisher.

• Provide a first aid kit at the storage point.

• Be sure you know the phone numbers of persons you should contact in case of an emergency.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-5

SAFETY

HIGH-TEMPERATURE HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

Immediately after operations are stopped, the engine coolant, engine oil, and hydraulic oil are at high temperatures, and are
still under pressure. Attempting to remove the cap, drain the oil or water, or replace the filters may lead to serious burns.
Always wait for the temperature to go down, and follow the specified procedures when carrying out these operations.

TO PREVENT HOT WATER FROM SPURTING OUT

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Allow the engine to cool. When checking if the water temperature has gone down, put your hand near the front face of the
radiator and check the air temperature. Be careful not to touch the radiator.
3. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing.

TO PREVENT HOT OIL FROM SPURTING OUT

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Allow the hydraulic oil to cool. When checking if the oil temperature has gone down, put your hand near the rear face of
the hydraulic tank and check the air temperature. Be careful not to touch the hydraulic tank.
3. Slowly loosen cap to relieve pressure before removing.

ROPS PRECAUTIONS
• The ROPS (ROLL-OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE) must never be removed when operating the machine.
• The ROPS is installed to protect the operator if the machine should roll over. ROPS is designed to support the load if the
machine rolls over and absorb the impact energy.
• The ROPS fulfills all the regulations and standards for all countries, but if it is rebuilt without authorization or is damaged
when the machine rolls over, the strength may drop and not be able to fulfill its function properly. it can only display its
performance if it is repaired or modified in the specified way.
• When modifying or repairing the ROPS, always first contact your Komatsu America International Company distributor.
• Even if the ROPS is installed, it cannot show its full effect if the operator does not fasten the seat belt properly. Always
fasten the seat belt when operating the machine.

OPTIONAL ATTACHMENTS PRECAUTIONS

• When installing and using an optional attachment, read the instruction manual for the attachment and the information
related to attachments in this manual.
• Do not use attachments that are not authorized by your distributor or Komatsu America International Company. Use of
unauthorized attachments could create a safety problem and adversely affect the proper operation and useful life of the
machine.
• Any injuries, accidents, product failures resulting from the use of unauthorized attachments will not be the responsibility
of Komatsu America International Company.

1-6 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

PRECAUTIONS WHEN HANDLING ACCUMULATORS

• Turning the blade cushion switch ON when the machine is traveling or when the work equipment is raised, the hydraulic
accumulator in the blade cushion is instantaneously connected with the lift cylinder bottom circuit. The oil will then flow
in or out to balance the oil pressure at the accumulator and lift cylinder bottom. Thus, the work equipment will move.
• When releasing the gas pressure or charging with gas for the work equipment circuit of machines equipped with an accu-
mulator or brake circuit accumulator be careful to follow the instructions given for handling the accumulator.
• Before working on the hydraulic circuit of the brakes or work equipment circuit of machines equipped with accumulators
slowly bleed all hydraulic pressure from the:
• Accumulator brake circuit. With the engine off, repetitively apply brakes until all hydraulic reserve pressure is
exhausted.
• Accumulator blade cushion: With the blade on the ground and the engine off, turn on the:
• blade cushion (if equipped).
• blade float and place lift cylinder in float (if equipped).
• all oil should now be bled from the cushion circuit.
• The accumulator is charged with high-pressure nitrogen gas, which is extremely dangerous. Read the following items and
be careful to handle the accumulator properly.
• Do not make any holes or bring any flame or heat close to the accumulator.
• Do not weld a boss to the accumulator.
• Release the gas before disposing of the accumulator. Ask your Komatsu distributor to perform this step.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-7

SAFETY

OPERATIONAL SAFETY

GENERAL

• Wear a well-fitting helmet, safety shoes and work clothes. If the nature of the work requires safety, wear protective gog-
gles or mask, thick gloves, ear plugs or other protection.
• Accidents or injuries are liable to occur when the operator is careless or slack. It is most important to bear safe operation
in mind at all times.
• Take care of your health. Do not drive when tired, taking medication, or after drinking.
• Learn the prohibitions, cautions, and rules about work procedures in the work site.
• When there is a leader, fix standard signals and always follow these signals when operating.
• When working on a road, pay attention to the safety of passing vehicles and pedestrians. If necessary, assign a signalman
or provide temporary barricades.
• If you need to operate on a street, protect pedestrians and cars by designating a person for work site traffic duty or by
installing barriers around the work site.
• Water lines, gas lines, telephone lines, and high-voltage electrical lines may be buried under the work site. Contact each
utility company BEFORE starting work to determine where the lines are buried. Be careful not to cut any of these lines
once you know where they are located.
• Check the depth and flow of water before operating in water or crossing a river. NEVER be in water which is in excess of
the permissible water depth.
• Thoroughly wipe off any grease, oil, or mud on the step, handrail, floor, or control levers. Failure to do this may cause you
to slip.
• Check the level of the fuel, lubricants and cooling water. Extinguish cigarettes before checking or replenishing. Check that
the radiator cap and each oil fill cap or plug is firmly tightened.
• Inspect for leaks from the:
• Fuel system
• Lubricating system
• Hydraulic system.
• Check:
• Tire pressure
• Hub nuts are torqued to specs.
• That no other parts are damaged or missing. Machines having such failures should not be operated.

FIRE PREVENTION
• Do not wear oil-stained clothing because it is likely to catch fire.
• Keep stored fuel, lubricants, and antifreeze away from an open flame.
• Completely remove all wood chips, leaves, grass, paper and other flammable materials accumulated in the engine com-
partment and around the battery. Check fuel, lubrication, and hydraulic system for leaks, and have any leaks repaired.
Wipe up any excess oil, fuel or other flammable fluids. Return all containers to their proper place.
• Check for damage to the electrical wiring.
• Be sure a fire extinguisher is present.
• Do not operate the machine near any fire or flame.

1-8 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

OPERATOR’S CAB
• Do not leave tools, spare parts or personal items lying around in the
operator's compartment. They may damage, break or jam the con-
trol levers or switches.
• Keep the cab floor, controls, steps, and handrails free of oil, grease,
snow, and mud.
• Check the seat belt, buckle and hardware for damage or wear.
Replace any worn or damaged parts. Clean the seat belt with warm
water and a mild detergent. NEVER use bleach, dye, or solvents to
clean the seat belt because they may weaken the webbing and result
in personal injury.
• ALWAYS use seat belts when operating your machine.
• Adjust the operator’s seat to a position where it is easy to perform
all operations.
• Check that the dash gauges work properly.

VENTILATION SAFETY
• When running the engine for long periods, open the windows or doors to ensure a good supply of fresh air.
• If it is necessary to start the engine within an enclosed area, provide adequate ventilation. Exhaust fumes from the engine
can be FATAL.
• If you handle fuel within an enclosed area, provide adequate ventilation to prevent from being overcome from the gas
fumes.

LIGHTS, MIRROR, WINDOWS

• Keep the windows and headlights clean to ensure good visibility.
• Ensure the windshield wipers are in good working and that the they don’t streak the windows.
• Ensure the windshield washing fluid container is full.
• Adjust all mirrors to give the best view from the operator’s seat.
• Clean the surface of the mirrors. If the mirror glass is damaged, replace it.
• Check that the head lamps and working lamps are installed to match the operating conditions. Check also that they light
up properly. Correct any defects.
• Before driving a grader onto a public road, ensure that:
• All of the stop lights, tail lights, hazard warning lights, and turn signals are working properly.
• The grader is equipped with the appropriate signs to meet local government requirements.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-9

SAFETY

BEFORE STARTING THE OPERATION

• Clear the area of personnel and obstruction before entering the cab.
• Examine the lay of the land and the kind of soil at the work site to determine the dangerous points and the best method of
operation. Proceed with the work only after making safety arrangements about the dangerous points.
• To ensure the safety of workers near the machine, always sound the horn to warn them before starting the engine and mov-
ing the machine. Be particularly careful to check that the rear is clear before backing the machine.
• Before starting the engine, confirm that all control levers are in the NEUTRAL or HOLD position.

BEFORE AND AFTER STARTING THE ENGINE

• Perform a visual check of the machine before starting the engine. Look for such things as missing protective devices,
leaks, improper fluid levels, trash buildup and loose, damaged or missing parts. DO NOT start the engine until any unsafe
conditions are corrected.
• Walk around your machine again just before mounting it, checking for people and objects that might be in the way.
• NEVER start the engine if a warning tag has been attached to the control.
• Just before starting the engine, sound the horn as an alert
• Start and operate the machine only while seated.
• Do not allow anyone other than the operator to ride in the cab or on the machine body.
• For machines equipped with a back-up alarm buzzer, check that the warning device operates correctly
• Keep hands and footwear free of grease, water and mud to ensure positive control movement.
• Before moving the machine, check the brakes, steering, attachment controls and safety devices for proper operation. DO
NOT operate the machine until any unsafe conditions have been corrected.
• Confirm that all gauges are within the prescribed range and that no warning lights are on.
• Check the play and travel of each lever and pedal.
• Operate the blade and other control levers to confirm that they are functioning normally.
• Move the machine slowly and listen carefully to the engine or gears to confirm that they are not making any unusual
noises.
• Operate the gear shift lever to confirm that the travel speeds for forward and reverse are functioning normally. Also, per-
form a brake test at each travel speed.
• Choosing a safe place, turn the machine to the left and right to confirm that the steering devices are functioning normally.
• If these tests reveal anything wrong, however slight it may be, contact the man in charge of the machine. Operate the
machine only after obtaining his permission.

1-10 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

DURING OPERATION
• Always concentrate. It is extremely dangerous to allow yourself to be distracted or to think of other things when operating
a machine.
• In dangerous places, or where there is restricted visibility, it is important to get down from the machine and confirm
whether it is safe before continuing work.
• The work area should be made as flat as possible. If the work area is flat, operation is easier, reducing operator fatigue.
• The machine should always be operated at a speed where it can be controlled. Never do the following:
• Speeding.
• Sudden starting, sudden braking, sudden turning.
• Snaking.
• Coasting.
• Always confirm that no one or an obstacle is in the way while driving or turning the machine.
• Always operate slowly when in crowded places. On haul roads or in narrow places, give way to loaded vehicles.
• Raise each work piece of equipment as high as possible and keep the blade within the machine width while traveling.
Maintain the specified traveling posture.
• Do not control the vehicle speed by pressing the brake as the brakes will overheat.
• Always be aware of the operating capacity of the machine. Using the machine to do work beyond its capacity will not
only damage the machine, but may even cause unexpected accidents.
• The machine condition can be judged from many factors. Changes in the gauges, sound, vibration, exhaust gas color or
response of the control levers can indicate a malfunction. Park the machine immediately in a safe place and take appropri-
ate action. Be especially careful of a fuel leak as there is danger of fire.
• If the machine breaks down and needs to be towed, check that the brakes are working properly. After ensuring the brakes
work, tow the grader with a wire rope or any other suitable towing equipment.
• When parking the machine after discontinuing work, put the gear shift lever into NEUTRAL, apply the parking brake,
lower the blade, scarifier and ripper to the ground, and set the control lever lockout switch to the LOCKED position.
Never leave the operator's seat without switching the engine OFF and removing the key.
• When continuing operations after the rain has stopped, working conditions will have changed. Proceed with caution. Be
particularly careful when approaching the shoulder of the road or cliffs, as they may have been loosened by the rain.
• Check the load limits of bridges before crossing.
• When operating on uneven ground, drive at as low a speed as possible and avoid sudden changes in direction.
• Do not approach the edge of a cliff or the shoulder of a road where there is danger of the machine falling over the side.
• The weight or vibration of the machine may cause a river embankment or piled soil to collapse. Be extremely careful
when operating in such places.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-11

SAFETY

DRIVING ON SLOPES
• Traveling on hills, banks or slopes that are steep could result in the machine tipping over or slipping.
• Do not travel up and down slopes of grass, fallen leaves and wet steel plates. These materials may cause the machine to
slip if it is traveling sideways.
• When driving on a slope, always drive directly up or down it. Never turn the machine on the slope, or never drive horizon-
tally or diagonally across the slope because the machine will roll over or slip sideways.

• Keep the travel speed very low while on a slope. Before going up or down a slope, select a travel speed most suited to the
slope. Do not change gears while on the slope.
• When going down a slope, use the engine as a brake (downshift the transmission). If this is not enough to control the
speed of the machine, use the wheel brake as well. Never coast down a slope with the gear shift lever in NEUTRAL or
with the transmission disconnect pedal DEPRESSED.
• If the engine stalls on a slope, use the brake to stop the machine, lower the blade, and apply the parking brake. Once the
grader is stopped, return the gear shift lever to NEUTRAL before starting the engine again.
• Never stop suddenly while on the slopes.
• When operating in snow, or cleaning snow, slight slopes can cause unexpected side slipping. In such places, operate with
extreme caution.

BACKING UP
Before backing up the machine, even if equipped with back-up alarm and mirrors, perform the following:
• Sound the horn to alert people nearby.
• Be sure no one is around machine, particularly behind the machine.
• Use a spotter if necessary, particularly if you are moving in reverse.
• When operating in areas that may be hazardous or have poor visibility, designate a person to direct WORK SITE traffic.
• Prevent people from entering the line of travel of the machine.

1-12 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

ARTICULATION SAFETY
• For general travel operations, leave the lock pin installed (arrow).

• BEFORE ARTICULATING THE MACHINE, remove the lock pin

and place it in the stored position (arrow).
• When using the articulation system, be particularly careful not to let
the blade damage the rear tires.
• Operating the articulation system when traveling at high speed may
cause the machine to overturn. Always perform this operation at a
speed below 6.2 MPH (10 km/h).

ROADING
• Always observe the traffic regulations and leave room for emergencies.
• When passing through a narrow space, be careful of the side and overhead clearances. Take special care not to touch any
obstacles on either side or overhead. If necessary, have someone outside the machine call out instructions.
• Set the machine in the travel posture and travel on a flat road. See TRAVEL POSTURE FOR MACHINE.
• When traveling on rough ground, travel at low speed and avoid turning sharply when changing direction.
• If the engine stops when the machine is traveling, the steering cannot be operated, so operation is dangerous. Apply the
brake immediately and stop the machine.
• Operate carefully when the wheels are leaning. Traveling on the roads with the wheels leaning is prohibited.
• When using articulation, maximum speed is 6.2 MPH (10 km/h). If the articulation is used when traveling at a speed of
over 6.2 MPH (10 km/h), the machine may overturn. Never use the articulation at speeds of over 6.2 MPH (10 km/h).
• It is dangerous to drive too fast, or to start or stop suddenly, turn sharply, or zigzag.
• If you find any abnormality in the machine during operation (noise, vibration, smell, incorrect gauges, air leakage, oil
leakage, etc.), move the machine immediately to a safe place and look for the cause.
• When passing over bridges or structures on private land, check first that the structure is strong enough to support the mass
of the machine. When traveling on public roads, check first with the relevant authorities and follow their instructions.
• Always obey the traffic regulations when traveling on public roads. This machine travels at a lower speed than normal
automobiles, so keep to the side of the road and be careful to leave the center of the road free for other vehicles.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-13

SAFETY

LIMITED VISIBILITY
• At night it is very easy to make mistakes in assuming the distance and height of objects and land. Thus, when operating at
night, be sure to arrange an adequate lighting system
• When operating in fog, mist, smoke, or where visibility is poor, be especially careful deciding whether the operation is
safe. When visibility is reduced, stop the work and wait for the visibility to improve.
• When snow is thrown to one side of the machine, use caution and watch for obstacles covered under the snow.

HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER LINES

• Before starting operations near high-voltage power lines, check with the electric company about the line voltage.
• Just going near high-voltage power lines can cause an electric shock. Always maintain the safe distance given below.

VOLTAGE MINIMUM SAFE DISTANCE

Meters Feet

100 ~ 200 2 7

6,600 2 7

22,000 3 10

66,000 4 14

154,000 5 17

187,000 6 20

275,000 7 23

500,000 11 36

• To prevent electrocution, do the following:

• On job sites where there is danger that the machine may touch the power lines, consult the electricity company before
starting operations to check that the actions determined by the relevant laws and regulations have been taken.
• Wear rubber shoes and gloves. Place a rubber sheet on top of the operator's seat.
• Be careful not to touch the chassis with any exposed part of your body.
• Use a signalman to give warning if the machine approaches too close to a power line.
• If the work equipment should touch a power line, do NOT leave the operator's compartment.
• Do not let anyone come close to the machine.

1-14 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

SNOW SAFETY
• Snow-covered and frozen ground may cause the machine to slip sideways, even if the grade is not steep. Travel at a slow
down the machine when traveling on such ground. Avoid rapid starts, stops, and steering.
• Frozen road surfaces becomes soft as the temperature rises. Thus, travel conditions become unstable.
• During snow removal work, pay special attention to the edge of the road and to objects under the snow.
• When traveling on snow-covered roads, always install tire chains.
• When traveling on snow-covered slopes, never use the brakes to stop the machine suddenly.
• Adjusting the load could cause the machine to slip sideways. Be careful when adjusting the load.

COLD TEMPERATURE PRECAUTION

• After completing operations, remove all water, snow, or mud stuck
to the wiring harness, connector (1), switches, or sensors, and cover
these parts. If ice forms on these parts, the machine will malfunc-
tion when it is used again, which may cause an accident.
• Perform the warm-up operation thoroughly. If the machine is not
thoroughly warmed up before the control levers are operated, the
reaction of the machine will be slow. And slow reaction time may
lead to an unexpected accident.
• Operate the control levers, steering and brakes to relieve the
hydraulic pressure (raise to above the set pressure for the hydraulic
circuit and release the oil to the hydraulic tank) to warm up the oil
in the hydraulic circuit. This ensures good response from the
machine and prevents malfunctions.
• If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the battery or start
the engine with a different power source. There is danger that this will ignite the battery.

PARKING
• When parking the machine, park it in a safe place outside the work-
ing area on flat, firm ground where there is no danger of rock falls,
landslides, or floods.
• If the machine has to be parked on a slope, park the machine facing
directly up or down the slope, and place chocks under the tires.
When the machine is facing downhill, lower the blade so that it cuts
slightly into the ground to further increase the safety.
• When parking the machine:
• Return the gear shift lever into NEUTRAL or the PARK position (if equipped).
• Apply the parking brake.
• Lower the blade, scarifier, and ripper to the ground.
• NEVER leave the operator's seat without switching the engine OFF and removing the key.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-15

SAFETY

TRANSPORTING THE GRADER

LOADING AND UNLOADING
• Loading and unloading the machine always involves potential hazards. EXTREME CAUTION SHOULD BE USED.
• When loading or unloading the machine, run the engine at low idle and travel at low speed.
• Perform loading and unloading on firm, level ground only. Maintain a safe distance from the edge of a road.
• ALWAYS block the wheels of the hauling vehicle and place blocks
under both ramps before loading and unloading.
• ALWAYS use ramps of adequate strength. Be sure the ramps are
wide and long enough to provide a safe loading slope.
• Be sure that the ramps are securely positioned and fastened, and that
the two sides are at the same level.
• Be sure the ramp surface is clean and free of grease, oil, ice and
loose materials. Remove dirt from the undercarriage.
• NEVER correct your steering while on the ramps. If necessary,
drive away from the ramps, correct the steering, and climb again.
• After loading, block the machine tires and secure the machine with
tidiness.

SHIPPING
• When shipping the machine on a flatbed, obey all state and local laws governing the weight, width, and length of a load
allowed
• Take into account the width, height, and weight of the grader when determining the shipping route.
• Before driving over bridges or structures on private land, check that the structure is strong enough to support the weight of
the machine.
• Before traveling on public roads, check first with the authorities and follow their instructions.

1-16 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

BATTERY
PREVENTING BATTERY HAZARDS
Battery electrolyte contains sulfuric acid. Batteries generate hydrogen gas. Thus, improper battery handling can lead to serious
injury or fire. For this reason, always observe the following precautions.
• Never bring any lighted cigarette or flame near the battery.
• When working with batteries, ALWAYS wear safety glasses and
rubber gloves.
• If you spill acid on your clothes or skin, immediately flush the area
with large amounts of water.
• Battery acid could cause blindness if splashed into the eyes. If acid
gets into your eyes, flush them immediately with large quantities of
water and see a doctor at once.
• If you accidentally drink battery acid, drink a large quantity of
water or milk, beaten egg or vegetable oil. Call a doctor or poison
prevention center immediately. Battery acid is poison.
• Before working with batteries, stop the engine and turn the starting switch to the OFF position.
• Batteries generate hydrogen gas that is very explosive and easily
ignited with a spark or flame.
• Avoid short-circuiting the battery terminals (between the positive
(+) and negative (-) terminals) through accidental contact with
metal objects, such as tools.
• Loose terminals can cause sparks which cause explosions. There-
fore securely tighten the terminals and the battery caps.
• When removing the battery, disconnect the negative (-) terminal
(ground side) first
• When installing the battery, connect the positive (+) terminal first.
• If the battery electrolyte is near the LOWER LEVEL, add distilled water. Do not add distilled water above the UPPER
LEVEL.
• When cleaning the top surface of the battery, wipe it with a cloth. Never use gasoline, thinner, or any other organic solvent
or cleaning agent.
• If the battery electrolyte is frozen, do not charge the battery or start the engine with a different power source. There is dan-
ger that this will ignite the battery.
• When charging or starting the engine with a different power source, thaw the battery electrolyte and check for leakage of
battery electrolyte before starting.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-17

SAFETY

JUMP STARTING WITH BOOSTER CABLES

If any mistake is made in the method of connecting the booster cables, the battery may explode. Always do the following.
• Always wear safety glasses when handling tools or booster cables near the batteries.
• Always first connect the positive (+) jumper cable from the assisting machine to the positive (+) battery post to the prob-
lem machine; always connect the negative (-) jumper cable from the assisting machine to a ground connection as far away
from the battery on the problem machine.
• Perform the starting operation with two workers (with one worker sitting in the operator's seat).
• When starting from another machine, do not allow the two machines to touch.
• When connecting the booster cables, turn the starting switch OFF for both the assisting machine and problem machine.
• Be sure to connect the positive (+) cable first when installing the booster cables. Disconnect the ground or negative (-)
cable first when removing them.
• If any tool touches between the positive (+) terminal and the chassis, sparks are created. The sparks can ignite the hydro-
gen gas created by the battery, causing the battery to explode.
• When removing the booster cables, do not let the booster cable clips touch each other or touch the machine. Sparks could
ignite the hydrogen gas created by the battery, causing the battery to explode.

BATTERY CHARGING
• If the battery is handled incorrectly when it is being charged, there is danger that the battery may explode, so follow the
instructions in HANDLING BATTERY and in the instruction manual for the charger, and always observe the following
precautions.
• Perform the charging in a well-ventilated place, and remove the battery caps. This disperses the hydrogen gas and pre-
vents explosion.
• Set the voltage on the charger to match the voltage on the battery to be charged. If the voltage setting is wrong, it will
cause the charger to overheat and catch fire, and this may lead to an explosion.
• Connect the positive (+) charging clip of the charger to the positive (+) terminal of the battery, then connect the negative (-
) charging clip to the negative (-) D terminal of the battery. Be sure to tighten both terminals securely.
• If the battery charge is less than 1/10 of the rated charge, and high speed charging is carried out, set to a value below the
rated capacity of the battery.
• If there is an excessive flow of charging current, the electrolyte may leak or evaporate. This situation may cause a fire or
the battery to explode.

1-18 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

TOWING
• Injury or death could result if a disabled machine is towed incorrectly.
• Always wear leather gloves when handling wire rope.
• When carrying out the preparation for towing with another worker, agree on signals before starting the operation.
• If the engine on the problem machine will not start or there is a failure in the brake system, please contact your Komatsu
distributor for repairs.
• It is dangerous to tow a machine on a slope, so choose a place where there is a gradual slope. If there is no place with a
gradual slope, perform work to make the slope as small as possible.
• When using another machine to tow this machine, ALWAYS use a wire rope with ample strength for the weight of the this
machine.
• Do not use a wire rope which has cut strands (A), kink (B), or
reduced diameter (C).
• Do not straddle the towing cable or wire rope.
• When connecting up a towing machine do not let anyone enter the
area between the towing machine and the machine equipment being
towed.
• Set the towing machine and towing connection of equipment being
towed in a straight line when connecting it.
• Place pieces of wood between the wire ropes and body to protect
them from wear or damage.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-19

SAFETY

TIRES
HANDLING TIRES
Tire changing can be dangerous, and should be done by trained personnel using proper tools and procedures. Failure to comply
with these procedures may result in faulty positioning of the tire and/or rim, and cause the assembly to burst with explosive
force, sufficient to cause serious physical injury or death.
• Never mount or use damaged tires or rims.
• Disassembly, repair, and assembly of tires requires specialist equipment and skill, please ask your specialist tire repair
shop to perform the repairs.

To ensure safety, always observe the following conditions.

• Use the specified tire inflation pressure. Low tire pressures may lead to abnormal overheating. Note that the tire infla-
tion pressures and permissible travel speed given in this manual are general values. The actual values depend on the
type of tires and the conditions under which the tires are used. Thus, check with your Komatsu distributor or tire man-
ufacturer for details.
• Use the specified tires. If the specified tires are not used, they may overheat and burst, or may be cut and burst by
sharp rocks when traveling on road surfaces. If the tires burst, this may lead to serious injury.

If the tires become hot, flammable gases are generated, and these may ignite. It is dangerous if the tires become hot when they
are under internal pressure. If the gas generated inside the tire ignites, the tire may explode and cause serious personal injury.
Because these explosions produce a high destructive force, they differ from the situation when a tire is punctured and bursts.

The following operations are PROHIBITED if the tire is pressurized:

• Performing welding operations on the rim.
• Performing welding operations or building fires near the wheel or tire.

If the procedure for replacing the wheel or tire is not properly understood and a mistaken method is used, the wheel or tire may
burst and cause injury or damage. When performing this operation, please consult with you Komatsu distributor or tire manu-
facturer.

1-20 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

STORING TIRES
• As a basic rule, store the tires in a warehouse where unauthorized persons cannot enter. If the tires are stored outside,
always surround the tires with a fence and make it clear even to young children that they should not go inside the fence.
• Stand the tire on horizontal ground, block it securely, and take steps to prevent the tire from rolling or falling over.
• If the tire should start to fall over, get out of the way immediately.
Tires for construction equipment are extremely heavy, so trying to
support them with human power may lead to serious human injury.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-21

SAFETY

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

BEFORE MAINTENANCE

MACHINE FAILURE
Not performing maintenance according to this manual may lead to unexpected machine failure. Contact your Komatsu distrib-
utor for repairs.

WARNING TAGS
Starting the engine while it is being serviced could seriously injure the
technician. Therefore, always attach the DO NOT OPERATE tag (right)
to the control lever in the operator’s cab while servicing the grader.
When the tag is not needed, store it in the cab glove box.

REPLACE SAFETY CRITICAL PARTS

Hoses and other parts of the fuel, hydraulic, and brake system are critical parts. If any of these parts failed, the operator’s
safety would be at risk.
• Replace these components periodically with new ones, regardless of whether or not they appear to be defective.
These components deteriorate over time.
• If the specified time for part replacement hasn’t yet been reached and a defect is found, replace or repair the part.
Replacement of safety critical parts requires skill. Please ask your Komatsu distributor to perform the replacement.

1-22 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

CLEAN BEFORE INSPECTION OR MAINTENANCE

• Clean the machine before performing inspection or maintenance. This action will ensure that dirt does not get into the
machine and that maintenance can be performed safely. Performing an inspection or maintenance on a dirty machine can
be difficult to find the location of a problem. And there is also the danger that dirt or mud will get in your eyes, and that
you could slip and injure yourself.
• When washing the machine, always do the following:
• Wear nonslip shoes to prevent from slipping on the wet surface.
• When using high-pressure steam to wash the machine, always wear protective clothing. This step will protect you
from being hit by high-pressure water. It can cut your skin and get mud or dust into your eyes.
• Do not spray water directly on to the electrical system (sensors,
connectors (1)). If water gets into the electrical system, it may
malfunction.

TOOLS
Use only tools suited to the task. Using damaged, low quality, faulty, or makeshift tools could cause personal injury.

LIGHT UP THE WORK AREA

• When checking fuel, oil, coolant, battery electrolyte, or window washer fluid, always use a light bulb with antiexplosion
specifications. If such lighting equipment is not used, an explosion may result if the bulb breaks.
• If work is performed in dark places without lighting, injury may result. Always install the proper lighting.
• If it is dark, do not use a lighter or flame instead of lighting because a fire may result. And if the hydrogen gas from bat-
tery ignites, an explosion will occur.
• When using the machine as the power supply for the lighting, follow the instructions in this Operation and Maintenance
Manual.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-23

SAFETY

STOP THE ENGINE

• Always stop the machine on firm flat ground and stop the engine before performing inspection and maintenance.
• If it is necessary to run the engine when performing maintenance, like cleaning the inside of the radiator, place the shift
lock lever at the PARK position. Perform the operation with two workers. One worker should sit in the operator’s seat so
that he can stop the engine immediately if necessary. The person in the operator’s seat should not touch the levers, unless
asked to do so by the technician.
• The worker performing the maintenance should be extremely careful not to touch or get caught in the moving parts.
• Lock the front and rear frames with the articulate lock pin.

KEEP IT CLEAN
Do not leave tools lying around the work place. Wipe up all grease, oil, water, or anything else that could cause you to slip.

WHEN WORKING WITH OTHERS

Misunderstandings between workers can lead to serious accidents. Therefore, when repairing the machine or when removing
and installing the work equipment, appoint a leader and follow his instructions during the operation.

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL

• When checking the engine coolant level, stop the engine. Wait for the engine and radiator to cool down. To determine the
radiator temperature:
• Put your hand near the engine or radiator to check the surrounding air temperature.
• Be careful not to actually touch the radiator or engine.
• When no heat can be felt, REMOVE THE CAP OF THE SUB-TANK; do not open the radiator cap.
• If a sub-tank does not exist:
• Slowly loosen the radiator cap to release the internal pressure before removing the cap.
• Remove the radiator cap slowly.

FIRE PREVENTION
There is danger of the fuel and battery gas catching fire during inspection or maintenance. Therefore, always follow the pre-
cautions below:
• Store fuel, oil, grease, and other flammable materials away from any flame.
• Use non-flammable materials as the flushing oil for cleaning parts. Do not use diesel oil or gasoline because they can
catch fire.
• Never smoke when performing an inspection or maintenance.
• When checking fuel, oil, or battery electrolyte, always use a light bulb with antiexplosion specification. Never use lighters
or matches as lighting.
• When performing grinding or welding operations on the chassis, remove any flammable materials to a safe place.
• Be sure that a fire extinguisher is present during inspection or maintenance.

1-24 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

DURING MAINTENANCE

PERSONNEL
• Only authorized personnel can service and repair the machine.
• Do not allow unauthorized personnel into the area. If necessary, employ an observer.

ATTACHMENTS
• Place attachments that have been removed from the machine in a safe place so that they do not fall. Put a fence around the
attachments, and set up “No Entry” signs to prevent unauthorized persons from coming close. If they fall on you or others,
serious injury could result.

WORKING UNDER THE MACHINE

• Stop the machine on firm, level ground, and lower all work equipment to the ground before performing service or repairs
under the machine.
• Always block the tires securely.
• Never work under the machine if the tires are off the ground and the machine is supported only by the work equipment.
• Never work under the machine if it is poorly supported.

DROPPING NUTS, BOLTS, OR TOOLS

• When opening the inspection window to perform an inspection, be careful not to drop any nuts, bolts, or tools inside the
machine. If such parts are dropped into the machine, it will break the machine, interfere with operation, and other failures.
If you drop any part into the machine, always be sure to remove it from the machine.
• When performing an inspection, do not carry any unnecessary tools or parts in your pocket.

GETTING HAMMERED
• Put a brass bar between the hammer and the part being hammered.
• If hard metal parts such as pins, or bearings are hit with a hammer, broken pieces may fly, causing injury. When using a
hammer, always wear safety glasses, safety helmet, and other protective clothing.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-25

SAFETY

WELDING
Welding operations must always be performed by a qualified welder and in a place equipped with a proper equipment. Gas is
generated, and there is danger of fire or electrocution when welding. Never allow an unqualified personnel to weld.

The qualified welder must follow the precautions below:

• Disconnect the negative battery terminals.
• Disconnect and remove the computers.
• Remove the paint from the place being welded to prevent gas from being generated.
• If hydraulic equipment or piping, or parts close to these, are heated, a flammable vapor is generated. Avoid applying heat
to such places.
• If heat is applied directly to rubber hoses or piping under pressure, they may suddenly burst. Thus, cover them with fire-
proof sheeting.
• Always wear protective clothing.
• Ensure that there is good ventilation.
• Clean up any flammable materials.
• Make sure a fire extinguisher is present during the welding operation.

PROBLEM FOUND
If any problem is found during an inspection, always make the needed repairs or a serious accident could result. Depending on
the type of failure, contact your Komatsu distributor for repairs.

FLUID SAFETY
Fuel, oil, antifreeze, and window washer fluid can be ignited by a flame. Thus, always observe the following:
• Do not smoke.
• Wipe up any spilled fuel, oil, antifreeze, or window washer fluid immediately.
• Tighten all fuel, oil, antifreeze, and window washer fluid caps securely.
• Use well-ventilated areas when adding or storing fuel, oil, antifreeze, and window washer fluid.
• When draining water from the fuel tank or fuel filter, catch the water-fuel mixture in a container. Dispose the mixture
properly.

AS THE FAN BLADES TURN

The fan blades and belts spin at a high speed. If wearing long-sleeve shirts, ensure that the cuffs are buttoned or that the sleeves
are securely rolled up. If the sleeves are unbuttoned and not rolled up, the fan or belt can grab the sleeve, pulling you with it,
causing injury or death.

RAISED CHASSIS
When performing maintenance with the work equipment or chassis raised:
• Lock the front and rear frames with the safety lock.
• Always place the levers in the HOLD position.
• Lock the control levers with the safety lock.
• Block the work equipment (blade, ripper, scarafier, snow plow, dozer blade).
• Always fit blocks under the wheels after jacking up the machine.

1-26 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

HIGH-PRESSURE SAFETY
• Work equipment hydraulic circuits are always under pressure. Thus, completely release the hydraulic pressure before add-
ing or draining oil, or performing maintenance.
• If oil is leaking under high pressure from small holes, it is dangerous if the jet of high-pressure oil hits your skin or enters
your eyes. Always wear safety glasses and thick gloves.
• Use a piece of cardboard or a sheet of wood to check for oil leakage.
• If you are hit by a jet of high-pressure oil, consult a doctor immedi-
ately for medical attention.
• Do not bend high-pressure hoses or hit them with hard objects. Do
not use any bent or cracked piping, tubes or hoses. They may burst
during use.
• Always repair any loose or broken fuel or oil hoses. If fuel or oil
leaks, it may cause a fire.

HOT OIL
• Immediately after stopping machine operations, the engine oil is hot. Draining the oil or replacing the filters may result in
burns or other injury. Thus, wait for the oil temperature to go down before draining the oil or replacing the filters.
• To safely determine the oil temperature:
• Put your hand near, but not touching, the hydraulic oil tank or radiator, depending on which system is to be serviced.
• Check the surrounding air temperature.
• Be careful not to actually touch the radiator or hydraulic oil tank.
• When no heat can be felt, service the specific system.

AFTER MAINTENANCE

CHECKS
Failure to fully inspect or perform all specified maintenance, may cause unexpected problems and may lead to personal injury
or death. Ensure that:
• All items requiring inspection have been inspected, especially hydraulic oil lines for leaks (engine speed raised, load
applied to hydraulic system).
• All maintenance has been performed, and performed correctly.
• No tools or parts have been dropped inside the machine, especially in the control lever linkage.

WASTE
• Never dump waste oil in a sewer system, rivers, etc.
• Always put oil drained from your machine in containers.
• Never drain oil directly on the ground.
• Obey the laws and regulations when disposing of harmful objects
such as oil, fuel, coolant, solvent, filters, batteries.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-27

SAFETY

PROTECTING CHROME-PLATED CYLINDERS

Follow the steps below when protecting chrome-plated cylinders on new equipment:
1. Position the equipment as it will be stored, and identify all the exposed portions of the chrome plated shafts.
2. Clean dirt and dust from the exposed portions of the shafting using a dry cloth or a cloth which has been dampened with
an appropriate solvent.
3. Prepare a mixture of 60% FERRO-KOTE 5856-HF* and 40% kerosene. Apply a thin coating of this mixture to the
exposed surfaces of the chrome plated shafting. No. 1 fuel oil may be substituted for Kerosene. A cloth dipped in the mix-
ture can be used to apply the coating.
4. Inspect the shaft surfaces after six months and apply additional corrosion preventative mixture.
5. If the equipment is to be moved and then stored again for an extended period of time, the steps above should be repeated
for all shafts that were stroked during the move.

Occasionally, it may be necessary to store equipment that has seen some service. The procedure described above can be used
for older equipment, but more careful cleaning of the shaft surfaces would be necessary. Also, there may be damage on some
of the shaft surfaces which will require additional protection.

Under no circumstances should sandpaper or other abrasives be used to clean the surfaces. Plastic or copper wool in combina-
tion with an appropriate solvent will remove most of the dirt. After the surface is clean it should be inspected for damage to the
chrome plate. If damage is detected, more frequent application of the corrosion preventative will be necessary to prevent cor-
rosion during storage.

*FERRO-KOTE 5856-HF is a product of Quaker Chemical Company, Conshohocken, PA. 19428.

1-28 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

SAFETY LABELS
Keep the safety labels clean so that they are readable. If a safety label becomes damaged or faded so that it becomes unread-
able, replace it with a new one.

POSITION OF SAFETY LABELS

The illustration below shows the location of each safety label. Each safety label is shown on the following pages.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-29

SAFETY

SAFETY LABELS IDENTIFIED

1. WARNING - PRESSURIZING/DEPRESSURIZING ACCUMULATORS. P/N 1430877H1.

1-30 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

2. DANGER - NO CLEARANCE. P/N 1263073H2.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-31

SAFETY

3. CAUTION - ENGINE COOLANT. P/N 1283701H1.

4. READ AND UNDERSTAND THE ENCLOSED MANUALS. P/N 1172130C1.

5. DANGER - NO CLEARANCE. P/N 1260702H1.

1-32 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

6. CAUTION - PRE-UNLOADING CHECKS. P/N 127859.

7. CAUTION - ROLL OVER. P/N 737993C2.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-33

SAFETY

8. CAUTION - THIS UNIT IS EQUIPPED WITH ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE. P/N 1260560H2.

1-34 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

9. IMPORTANT - TO CHECK TRANSMISSION OIL LEVEL. P/N 1270967H1.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-35

SAFETY

10. WARNING - BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GAS. P/N 1236346H2.

1-36 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

11. CAUTION - READ AND UNDERSTAND OPERATOR’S MANUAL. P/N 1285791H1.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-37

SAFETY

12. CAUTION - READ AND UNDERSTAND OPERATOR’S MANUAL. P/N 1260502H1.

1-38 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SAFETY

13. NO JUMP START. P/N 09842-A0481. DO NOT short circuit the starting motor terminals to jump start the engine.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 1-39

SAFETY

1-40 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 2OPERATION

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-1

OPERATION

UNIVERSAL SYMBOLS
These universal symbols are an effort to overcome language differences for all operators, enhancing safety through instant rec-
ognition of the instruments and controls. Study the following symbols so you will know, at a glance, their meaning.

2-2 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

PREPARATION FOR USE

After the initial delivery or following transportation of the machine from one job site to another, it is recommended that the
following inspection and report be conducted.

Before unloading the grader, check it thoroughly for any damage during shipment. Inspect the instruments, power unit and
controls. If damage is found, contact the carrier or his agent and report the extent of damage or pilferage. Have this noted on
the transportation document.

Contact your distributor to advise him of the damage. He will assist you to obtain the necessary repairs and to expedite any
claim you might have against the transportation company.

Check for tags wired to the unit. These tags will indicate whether the radiator is drained, filled with water or permanent-type
antifreeze solution. In which case, the radiator coolant should be checked for proper protection against ambient temperatures.

Remove dirt and/or grease from the exposed parts, particularly the cylinder piston rods.

Lubricate the grader fully in accordance with both the Each Shift/10 Hour and Weekly/50 Hour Service intervals. See “Lubri-
cation Instructions” Section 3, in this manual for further information.

Attention must be given to the INITIAL filter service during the first 20 Hours and 50 Hours of operation on a new machine
and/or rebuild of certain components. These filters are as follows:
1. Transmission Filter (First 20 Hours of service.)
2. Hydraulic Oil Filter (First 50 Hours of service.)

Attention must also be given to the INITIAL oil change for the rear axle differential. Drain and refill the oil after the first 100
Hours of operation.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-3

OPERATION

OPERATIONAL CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

The “Operational Controls and Instrumentation” section presented here consists of the following groups:

• OPERATOR'S CAB AND CONTROLS

• STEERING WHEEL
• CONTROL VALVE LEVERS
• FOOT CONTROLS
• SHIFT CONSOLE AND CONTROLS
• STEERING CONSOLE CONTROLS AND GAUGES
• OPERATOR'S SEAT
• SUN SHADE
• DOME LIGHTS AND FANS
• MISCELLANEOUS GAUGES AND VALVES
• ACCESS COVERS, HOOD SIDES, AND TOOL BOX
• INTERACTING CONTROLS

Each group is explained with a point location drawing or photo and a brief description of each control, switch, gauge, or valve.

Indicator lights work in addition to the gauges on the instrument panel. The operator should monitor machine pressures on the
instrument panel along with pilot lights. These lights will only give the operator an indication that a problem exists.

When any one or more of the control console warning lights come ON, immediately discontinue operation
and shutdown the unit. Investigate and correct the problem before proceeding with operation.

2-4 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

OPERATOR'S CAB AND CONTROLS

1. STEERING CONSOLE CONTROLS AND GAUGES (SEE PAGE 2-27)

2. RIGHT-HAND CONTROL LEVERS (SEE PAGE 2-14)
3. HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS (SEE PAGE 2-36)
4. SHIFT CONSOLE AND CONTROLS (SEE PAGE 2-18)
5. ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE CONTROL MODULE (SEE PAGE 2-43)
6. FOOT CONTROLS (SEE PAGE 2-17)
7. LEFT-HAND CONTROL LEVERS (SEE PAGE 2-10)
8. STEERING WHEEL (SEE PAGE 2-8)
9. SUN SHADE (SEE PAGE 2-41)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-5

OPERATION

BEACON
The beacon (1), an option, mounts on top of the cab.

The light can be placed into a stowed position while the unit is being
transported on another vehicle. Remove the hair pin (2) and pin (3) from
the left side of the support (4) and rotate the light 180°. Install the pin (3)
and hair pin (2) to secure the light in the transport position. Reverse this
procedure to place the light (1) into operation.

CAB DOORS

Never operate the grader with the door unlatched.

Do not open the doors when the unit is articulated or on uneven ground.

A cab door is provided on each side of the cab to gain entry to the oper-
ator's compartment. A person on the ground can open the door by rotat-
ing the cab door handle (1).

During operation, the cab door can be swung open. The door latches to
the outside of the cab so that the door remains in the open position. To
release the door from the latch, pull down on the lever (2). The cab door
can now be closed.

2-6 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

LOWER OPENING FRONT CAB WINDOWS

Lower opening front cab windows, an option, can be opened to allow the
fresh outside air into the operator’s compartment. A knob and slide rail
arrangement allows the windows to be held open at various angles. A
latch at the cab corner locks the windows to prevent vandalism.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-7

OPERATION

STEERING WHEEL
STEERING WHEEL TILT KNOB
The steering wheel tilt knob (arrow) adjusts the steering wheel angle
either up or down for operator comfort. Turn the knob CCW to unlock
the tilt. Turn the knob CW to lock the tilt once the desired position is
obtained.

TURN SIGNAL LEVER, HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH,

HEADLIGHT DIMMER BUTTON, AND HORN
The turn signal lever, which also contains the hazard flasher switch and
headlight dimmer switch, is located on the steering column near the
steering wheel. Pushing the turn signal selector lever (1) upward acti-
vates the right turn signal; pulling downward activates the left turnsig-
nal. Pulling the hazard warning switch (2) out activates the hazard
warning signals.

Remark
To turn off any of the three functions, the selector lever must
be returned to its OFF position.

The high-low beam headlight dimmer switch button (3) is located at the
end of the turn signal selector lever (1).

Press the horn button (4) to sound the horn.

2-8 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

CONTROL LEVERS
Located on either side of the steering control panel are the control valve levers. The standard grader is equipped with eight
control levers and valves. An additional six levers and valves for various options may be added (three to the left hand valve
bank; three to the right hand valve bank). Configuration of these valve bank arrangements may vary from the standard valve
banks shown here.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-9

OPERATION

LEFT-HAND CONTROL LEVER BANK

1. Left-hand blade lift 4. Blade pitch 7. Auxiliary (dozer blade, snow plow, snow wing)
2. Ripper or Scarifier 5. Circle drive
3. Blade shift 6. Auxiliary (dozer blade, snow plow, snow wing)

1. LEFT-HAND BLADE LIFT

A. Push to lower the left side of the blade.

B. Center position stops and holds the blade in the

same position.

C. Pull to raise the left side of the blade.

2-10 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

2. RIPPER or SCARIFIER
A. Push to lower the ripper/scarifier.

B. Center position stops and holds rip-

per/scarifier in same position.

C. Pull to raise the ripper/scarifier.

Remark
When using the ripper, remove the
the lock bar.

Do not turn the steering wheel while using the scarifier. If you do, the scarifier teeth will break or they will
cut the tire.

3. BLADE SHIFT
A. Push to move the blade to the left.

B. The center position stops and holds the blade in.

C. Pull to move the blade to the right.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-11

OPERATION

4. BLADE PITCH
A. Push to move the top of the blade forward.

B. The center position stops and holds the blade in

the same position.

C. Pull to move the top of the blade rearward.

5. CIRCLE DRIVE
A. Push to rotate the circle counterclockwise.

B. The center position stops and holds the circle in

the same position.

C. Pull to rotate the circle clockwise.

2-12 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

6. AUXILIARY/OPTIONAL
(DOZER BLADE, SNOW PLOW, SNOW WING)
A. Push to lower the dozer blade, plow, or snow
wing.

B. The center position stops and holds the dozer

blade, snow plow or snow wing in the same
position.

C. Pull to raise the dozer blade, plow, or snow

wing.

Remark
If the grader comes with a factory-installed dozer blade or snow plow, the decal on the control lever knob will
have an icon of the dozer blade and up/down arrows on it (above). However, if the grader does not have a fac-
tory-installed dozer blade or snow plow and is only set up at the factory for auxiliary attachments, the control
lever knob will have the AUX and up/down arrows on it (below).

7. AUXILIARY
(DOZER BLADE, SNOW PLOW, SNOW WING)
A. Push to lower the dozer blade, snow plow, or
snow wing.

B. The center position stops and holds the dozer

blade, show plow, or snow wing in the same
position.

C. Pull to raise the dozer blade, snow plow, or

snow wing.

Remark
The standard industry practice is that pushing a control lever either lowers an attachment or causes it to move
to the left. However, pulling a control lever raises the attachment or causes it to move to the right. If auxiliary
attachments are installed in the field and it is decided to deviate from the industry standard, notify the operator.

Remark
When mounting a specialized attachment to the grader, always consult with the attachment manufacturer to
ensure correct hydraulic control configuration (i.e. holding valve, floating valve, or both). This step ensures a
proper machine match.

Have only qualified personnel install the attachment to the grader.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-13

OPERATION

RIGHT-HAND CONTROL LEVER BANK

1. Circle shift 4. Right-hand blade lift 7. Auxiliary

2. Articulation 5. Auxiliary
3. Wheel lean 6. Auxiliary

1. CIRCLE SHIFT
A. Push to shift circle drawbar to the left.

B. The center position stops and holds the circle

drawbar in the same position.

C. Pull to shift the circle drawbar to the right.

2-14 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

2. ARTICULATION
A. Push to move the rear module from the center to
the left, assisting in a left turn.

B. The center position stops and holds the frame

members in the same position.

C. Pull to move the rear module from the center to

the right, assisting in a right turn.

When articulating the unit, the blade may hit either the left or right front tandem tire and damage it. Keep
your eye on the blade when articulating the machine.

3. WHEEL LEAN
A. Push to lean front wheels to the left, assisting in
a left turn.

B. The center position stops and holds the wheels

in the same position.

C. Pull to lean the front wheels to the right, assist-

ing in a right turn.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-15

OPERATION

4. RIGHT-HAND BLADE LIFT

A. Push to lower the left side of the blade.

B. The center position stops and holds the blade in

the same position.

C. Pull to raise the right side of the blade.

5. AUXILIARY
A. Push to lower or move to the left.

B. The center position stops the attachment and

holds it at that position.

C. Pull to raise or move to the right.

6. AUXILIARY - see 5 above

7. AUXILIARY - see 5 above

Remark
The standard industry practice is that pushing a control lever either lowers an attachment or causes it to move
to the left. However, pulling a control lever raises the attachment or causes it to move to the right. If auxiliary
attachments are installed in the field and it is decided to deviate from the industry standard, notify the operator.

Remark
When mounting a specialized attachment to the grader, always consult with the attachment manufacturer to
ensure correct hydraulic control configuration (i.e. holding valve, floating valve, or both). This step ensures a
proper machine match.

Have only qualified personnel install the attachment to the grader.

2-16 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

FOOT CONTROLS
Four foot pedals are located in the operator's cab. One pedal on the left
side of the operator's console and three on the right.

1. Decelerator Pedal - Right side of the console against the seat box.
2. Foot Brake Pedal - Right side of console. The brake pedal hydrau-
lically applies the wet brakes located internally within the final
drive. Releasing the pedal releases the springs in the final drive,
which releases the brakes.
3. Accelerator Pedal - Far right of console.
4. Transmission Disconnect Pedal - Far left of the console. This
pedal is used to shift the transmission to NEUTRAL, without physi-
cally moving the transmission gear range lever.

The accelerator and decelerator pedals work in conjunction with the

engine speed control lever. With the engine speed control lever in the
slow position (toward front of the machine), the engine speed may be raised by depressing the accelerator pedal. When accel-
erator pedal is released, engine speed will return to the setting determined by the engine speed control lever.

When the engine speed control lever is in the fast position (toward the rear of the machine), engine speed may be lowered by
depressing the decelerator pedal. When decelerator pedal is released, engine speed will return to the setting determined by the
engine speed control lever.

Remark
Decelerator pedal may also be used to aid in braking the machine. Always depress the decelerator pedal (1)
before applying the foot brake pedal (2).

Generally, working speeds are first through fourth. Depending upon type of work being done, fifth and sixth gears may also be
used as working gears.
The grader is capable of working at any position of engine speed control lever, however, the transmission system will work
best when you follow these directions:
1. Move engine speed control lever toward fast until desired ground speed is obtained.
A. If the engine speed control lever position is 2/3 or more of total lever travel, shift gear range control into next higher
gear.

B. Adjust engine speed control lever until desired ground speed is obtained.

2. Put blade in ground in normal working manner.

3. When gears are selected correctly and speed control is used properly, engine speed will vary with load,
(within horsepower limits of the engine). Travel speed of the grader must be maintained by using the accelerator
and decelerator pedal.

When roading the grader, downshift the transmission one gear at a time.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-17

OPERATION

SHIFT CONSOLE AND CONTROLS

TRANSMISSION GEAR RANGE LEVER AND ENGINE SPEED CONTROL LEVER

U-PATTERN SHIFTER
The console located at the right hand side of the operator's seat houses
the lock button (1), transmission gear range lever (2), and engine speed
control lever (3).

1. Neutral Lock - Used to lock the transmission gear range lever in

PARK. In order to shift out of PARK, push down on the orange lock
button (1). Pull the gear range lever (2) into the NEUTRAL posi-
tion. The gear range lever (2) can now be shifted to any desired
position.

Remark
Before leaving the machine, lock the transmission gear range
lever in PARK.

When parking the machine, stop the engine, lock the transmission gear range lever in PARK, apply the
parking brake, turn off the ignition switch and remove the key.

2. Transmission Gear Range Lever - Allows the operator to choose the gear range from first through sixth in forward; first
through third in reverse.

Remark
Release the parking brake with the transmission gear range lever in the PARK position for the transmission to
engage the gears. Transmission gear range lever MUST BE in the PARK position to complete the cranking cir-
cuit before starting the engine.

When encountering a downhill grade, shift the transmission into a lower gear. Downshifting will allow the
engine to provide additional dynamic braking power. The slope of the grade and the type of the terrain
must always be taken into consideration.

3. Engine Speed Control - Allows the operator to manually control the engine speed in forward or reverse in any gear. This
lever also works in conjunction with the accelerator and decelerator pedals.

2-18 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

IN-LINE PATTERN SHIFTER

The console located at the right hand side of the operator's seat houses
the neutral lock (1), transmission gear range lever (2), and engine speed
control lever (3).

1. Neutral Lock - Used to lock the transmission gear range lever in

NEUTRAL. In order to shift out of NEUTRAL, pull up on the
neutral lock (1) to the unlocked position. The gear range lever (2)
can now be shifted to any desired position.

When parking the machine, stop the engine, lock the transmission gear range lever in PARK, apply the
parking brake, turn off the ignition switch and remove the key.

2. Transmission Gear Range Lever - Allows the operator to choose the gear range from first through sixth in forward; first
through third in reverse.

Remark
Release the parking brake with the transmission gear range lever in the PARK position for the transmission to
engage the gears. Transmission gear range lever MUST BE in the PARK position to complete the cranking cir-
cuit before starting the engine.

When encountering a downhill grade, shift the transmission into a lower gear. Downshifting will allow the
engine to provide additional dynamic braking power. The slope of the grade and the type of the terrain
must always be taken into consideration.

3. Engine Speed Control - Allows the operator to manually control the engine speed in forward or reverse in any gear. This
lever also works in conjunction with the accelerator and decelerator pedals.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-19

OPERATION

SHIFT CONSOLE CONTROL PANEL

1. Rear work light switch (if equipped) 11. Ignition key switch
2. Beacon light switch (if equipped) 12. Rear wiper switch
3. Instrument panel light 13. Blade cushion switch (if equipped)
4. Front head light switch 14. Auxiliary float switch (if equipped)
5. Front work light switch (if equipped) 15. 6 x 6 (All-Wheel-Drive) switch (if equipped)
6. Blade work light switch (if equipped) 16. Parking brake switch
7. Front upper wiper/front and rear washer switch (if equipped) 17. Auxiliary
8. Front lower wiper/washer switch (if equipped) 18. Auxiliary
9. Ether injection button (if equipped) 19. Auxiliary
10. Starter button

2-20 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

1. Rear Work Light Switch - Activates the rear work lights.

A. OFF position.

B. ON position.

Remark
The front head light switch must be ON in the parking light
position for the work light to turn ON.

2. Beacon Light Switch - Activates the beacon light.

A. OFF position.

B. ON position.

3. Instrument Panel Light - The panel lights illuminates this panel

when the front head light switch is activated.

4. Front Head Light Switch - A three-position switch.

A. ON position.

B. OFF position.

C. BULB CHECK position. All instrument panel warning lights

should remain on while the switch is at this position.

Remark
A foot switch controls the high/low beam headlights.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-21

OPERATION

5. Front Work Light Switch - Activates the front work lights.

A. OFF position.

B. ON position.

Remark
The front head light switch must be ON in the parking light
position for the work light to turn ON.

6. Blade Work Light Switch - Activates the blade work lights.

A. OFF position

B. ON position

7. Front Upper Wiper/Front and Rear Washer Switch - This three-

position switch controls the front upper wiper. Fully counterclock-
wise position is OFF, center position is LOW and fully clockwise is
HIGH.
A. OFF position.

B. LOW position.

C. HIGH position.

D. WASHER FLUID position. Push the knob to squirt the window

washer fluid on the upper front and rear window.

2-22 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

The washer fluid tank is located to the right of the operator's seat.

8. Front Lower Wiper/Washer Switch - This three-position switch

controls the front upper wiper. Fully counterclockwise position is
OFF; center position is LOW; fully clockwise is HIGH.
A. OFF position.

B. LOW position.

C. HIGH position.

D. WASHER FLUID position. Push the knob to squirt the window

washer fluid onto the lower front window.

9. Ether Injection Button - The ether injector button controls the

ether injector for cold weather starting. When this switch is
depressed and held, a measured amount of ether is injected into the
engine for cold weather starting. Refer to the “Engine Starting” sec-
tion in this manual.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-23

OPERATION

Do not use the ether injector when the air temperature is above freezing. Follow the correct method for
starting the engine. Refer to “Engine Starting” section of this manual.

10. Starter Button - With the ignition key switch turned to the ON
position, depress the starter button to engage the cranking motor.

Remark
Ignition key must be in the ON position and the transmission
gear range lever must be in NEUTRAL or PARK position to
complete the cranking circuit. See “Start-up Procedure” sec-
tion of this manual for further information.

11. Ignition Key Switch - Insert the key and turn clockwise to the ON
(RUN/START) position. The ignition key must be in this position
for the cranking circuit and fuel system to be activated. Turning the
key counterclockwise shuts down the unit by deactivating the fuel
solenoid.
A. OFF position.

B. ON (RUN/START) position.

12. Rear Wiper Switch - This three-position switch controls the rear-
wiper. Fully counterclockwise position is OFF, center position is
LOW and fully clockwise is HIGH.
A. OFF position.

B. LOW position.

C. HIGH position.

2-24 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

13. Blade Cushion Switch - Activates blade cushion.

A. OFF position.

B. ON position.

14. Auxiliary Float Switch - An electric float allows the blade to float
or follow the contour of the road when snow plowing, preventing
damage to the grader. Auxiliary float switch is for V-plows and
snow wings, if the unit is equipped with these features. Pull and
above the switch to the right to activate the auxiliary float. Move the
switch to the left to deactivate the float. The blade should be resting
on the ground before activating the switch.
A. OFF position.

B. ON position.

Flipping the auxiliary float switch to the ON position causes the blade to go into float condition. If the blade
is elevated when the switch is activated, the blade will free-fall to the ground. This action could result in
serious personal injury or death to a bystander.
Before servicing the accumulator, rest the blade solidly on the ground. Resting the blade on the ground
will ensure that cylinder drift will not occur when servicing accumulator.
The grader should be sitting still and not moving. Blade will drift to the road surface. Make certain nothing
is underneath the blade.
Optional float works best on hard (asphalt) road surfaces. Use caution on soft (nonasphalt) material.
Use extreme care when working around railroad tracks and expansion joints on bridges.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-25

OPERATION

15. 6 x 6 All-Wheel-Drive Switch - This three-position switch controls

the AWD System. The left hand position is OFF, center position is
NORMAL and the right hand position is the AGGRESSIVE mode.
A. OFF position.

B. NORMAL position.

C. AGGRESSIVE position.

16. Parking Brake Switch - The parking brake switch controls the
spring applied and hydraulically released parking brake caliper
located on the final drive. Pulling the switch out (B) hydraulically
releases the parking brake. The amber indicator light will turn off
only when adequate pressure exists to release the parking brake.
Pushing the switch in (A) releases hydraulic pressure, applying the
parking brake. The amber indicator light comes on.
A. APPLIED position.

B. RELEASED position.

Always apply the parking brake when the grader is parked.

When the ignition key is ON the parking brake can release. The accumulator in the hydraulic circuit provides reserve hydraulic
pressure.

Remark
In the event of a steering and/or brake system failure, apply the parking brake.

17. Auxiliary Switch - Activates an attachment.

A. OFF position.

B. ON position.

18. Auxiliary Switch - see 17 above

19. Auxiliary Switch - see 17 above

2-26 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

STEERING CONSOLE CONTROLS AND GAUGES

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Parking brake light (amber) 14. L.H. blade float switch (optional)
2. Engine coolant temperature gauge 15. Converter oil temperature gauge
3. Fuel gauge 16. Hydraulic filter light (amber)
4. Voltmeter gauge 17. Engine coolant temperature light (red)
5. Engine oil pressure gauge 18. Transmission filter light (amber)
6. Tachometer (optional) 19. Transmission clutch pressure (red)
7. Articulation indicator 20. Engine oil pressure light (red)
8. R.H. blade float switch (optional) 21. Differential lock/unlock light (green)
9. Brake and steering light (red) 22. Console release lever (not shown)
10. 6X6 AWD light (green) (if equipped) 23. Hour meter (not shown)
11. Low coolant light (optional) 24. Audible alarm (not shown)
12. Hydraulic oil temperature light (red) (with AWD only) 25. Lock/unlock differential (not shown)
13. Saddle pin release switch (if equipped)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-27

OPERATION

1. Parking Brake Light (amber) - Indicates that the parking brake is

applied.

2. Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge - The engine should not be

placed under heavy load until it is warmed up to 160° F (71° C) or
more. Gauge should remain in the GREEN zone during operation.
Never continue to operate the engine if the temperature gauge regis-
ters 212° F (100° C) or more. SHUTDOWN THE ENGINE IMME-
DIATELY AND REPAIR THE CAUSE.

3. Fuel Gauge - Indicates the fuel level in the fuel tank.

4. Voltmeter Gauge - Indicates the condition of the battery before and

after operating the engine. An undercharged battery can be detected
immediately, without being caught unprepared with a slow cranking
situation. Overcharged batteries can be detected immediately with-
out the need for a period of battery water usage checks. The voltme-
ter also indicates the amount of voltage being produced by the
charging circuit.

Remark
More detailed information on the voltmeter and charging cir-
cuit follows in “Before Starting Engine,” “Engine Starting” and
“Engine Warm-Up” sections of this manual.

2-28 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

5. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge - Gauge should be in the GREEN zone

when the engine is running. Expect the following readings during
normal operation:

OIL PRESSURE:
idle speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PSI (0.7 kg/cm²)
full speed and load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 PSI (2.1 kg/cm²)

If the specified oil pressure is not indicated within 25 to 30 seconds after start up, turn off the engine imme-
diately. Determine the cause for low or no oil pressure and make the needed repairs. Never operate the
engine with low or no oil pressure indication in the hope that a faulty gauge or cold oil is responsible.

6. Tachometer (optional) - Indicates engine RPM. Multiply the read-

ing on the scale by 1,000.

7. Articulation Indicator - Indicates if the rear module is articulated

to the left, to the right, or in the center.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-29

OPERATION

8. Right Hand Blade Float Switch (optional) - An electric float

allows the blade to float or follow the contour of the road when
snow plowing, preventing damage to the grader. Pull up and move
the switch forward to activate the float condition. Move the switch
down to deactivate the float condition. The blade should be resting
on the ground before activating the switch.
A. OFF position.

B. ON position.

Flipping the auxiliary float switch to the ON position causes the blade to go into float condition. If the blade
is elevated when the switch is activated, the blade will free-fall to the ground. This action could result in
serious personal injury or death to a bystander.
Before servicing the accumulator, rest the blade solidly on the ground. Resting the blade on the ground
will ensure that cylinder drift will not occur when servicing accumulator.
The grader should be sitting still and not moving. Blade will drift to the road surface. Make certain nothing
is underneath the blade.
Optional float works best on hard (asphalt) road surfaces. Use caution on soft (nonasphalt) material.
Use extreme care when working around railroad tracks and expansion joints on bridges.

9. Brake and Steering Light (red) - Lights when the hydraulic oil
pressure is insufficient for normal braking. Shutdown the unit
immediately and discontinue operation. There is a reserve braking
capability provided by the brake accumulator located in the circuit
for only several pumps on the brake pedal. An alarm will sound to
let the operator know that there is low oil pressure for the brake sys-
tem.

If the alarm sounds, discontinue operation immediately.

2-30 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

10. 6 x 6 All-Wheel-Drive Light (green) - Lights when the AWD sys-

tem is activated.

11. Low Coolant Light (optional) - Lights when the coolant level in
the radiator is below a safe operating level.

12. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Light (red, with AWD only) - Lights
when the hydraulic oil temperature exceeds the normal operating
range.

13. Saddle Pin Release Switch (if equipped) - The saddle pin release
switch hydraulically releases the saddle pin.
A. OFF POSITION.

B. ON POsition.

If the movement of lock pin cylinder is sluggish, additional force

may be exerted on lock pin by operating the steering system (turn-
ing the steering wheel).

Refer to “Banksloping” in this manual for further information on

the use of this control with the blade suspension assembly.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-31

OPERATION

14. Left Hand Blade Float Switch (optional) - An electric float allows
the blade to float or follow the contour of the road when snow plow-
ing, preventing damage to the grader. Pull up and move the switch
forward to activate the float condition. Move the switch down to
deactivate the float condition. The blade should be resting on the
ground before activating the switch.
A. OFF position.

B. ON position.

15. Converter Oil Temperature Gauge - Indicates the temperature of

the transmission oil used before it returns to the hydraulic oil cooler.
Normal operating temperature is from 200° F to 250° F (93° C to
121° C), which is in the GREEN zone. This temperature should not
exceed 250° F (121° C). Temperatures at or near this value may
indicate a need for service because of improper cooler operation or
other system malfunction. If the needle enters the RED zone, shift
to a lower gear and/or stop operation and wait until it returns to the
GREEN zone. If the needle stays in the RED zone, discontinue
operation and investigate the cause.

16. Hydraulic Filter Light (amber) - Lights when the hydraulic oil fil-
ter(s) requires service.

Remark
There is no indicator light for the old style AWD filter. If the fil-
ter lights comes ON for the hydraulic oil filter, change the
AWD oil filter at the same time. The new style AWD filter will
activate its own indicator light.

17. Engine Coolant Temperature Light (red) - Lights when the

engine coolant temperature is too hot.

2-32 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

18. Transmission Filter Light (amber) - Indicates that transmission

oil filter element needs servicing.

Remark
In cold weather operation and/or initial startup (when the
transmission oil is cold) the oil will have a higher viscosity
which may allow the filter to bypass intermittently. When this
situation happens, the filter bypass indicator light will be acti-
vated. Check the converter out oil temperature. If the temper-
ature is in the normal working range, change the filter. If the
converter out oil temperature is below the normal working
range, stop the machine and stall the converter. Observe the
bypass indicator to be deactivated as the oil warms up. If this action disarms the system, work the transmission
in a higher gear to keep the converter oil temperature in the normal working range. If this action does not dis-
arm the system, change the filter.

19. Transmission Clutch Pressure Light (red) - Lights when trans-

mission oil pressure is too low. See the appropriate transmission
shop manual for servicing.

20. Engine Oil Pressure Light (red) - Lights when there is a loss of
engine oil pressure or when oil level is low.

21. Differential Lock/Unlock Light (green) - Lights when the differ-

ential is locked (engaged).

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-33

OPERATION

22. Console Release Lever - The console release lever (arrow) is

located on the right side of the operator's console. Pull the lever
toward the rear of the machine. Hold the lever rearward while
adjusting the console to a comfortable position. Releasing the lever
locks the console at the desired position.

23. Hour Meter - The hour meter (arrow) is located on the right side of
the operator's console. This meter records the total number of hours
the grader has been operated. After reading the hour meter, read the
“Periodic Service Chart and Table” to determine the service at the
recommended intervals.

24. Audible Alarm (standard for engine coolant and hydraulic oil pressure) - The audible alarm is located on the front
side of the steering console. This alarm will sound when ignition key is turned to the ON position. The alarm will continue
to sound until the engine starts. Once the engine starts the alarm is silenced and will not sound again unless a malfunction
occurs. Should the alarm sound during operation, immediately stop the machine and correct the problem before starting
the machine again.

25. LOCK/UNLOCK DIFFERENTIAL - Although similar to a stan-

dard differential, the lock/unlock differential has a clutch pack.
When the switch is at the LOCK DIFFERENTIAL position, the
clutch packs prevents the one side gear from rotating independently
of the differential housing. The pinion gears and side gears now turn
as one unit and not independently, which in essence creates a solid
axle shaft.

To lock the differential, move the toggle switch to the LOCK DIF-
FERENTIAL position. However, to unlock the differential, move
the toggle switch to the UNLOCK DIFFERENTIAL position.

2-34 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

26. Steering Wheel Tilt Lock - To adjust the steering wheel position,
turn the knob counterclockwise to loosen. Position the steering
wheel to the desired position. Now, turn the knob clockwise to lock
the steering wheel in place.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-35

OPERATION

HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS

The heating/air conditioning controls are located to the right of and
below the operator’s seat.

The heating/air conditioning control panel consists of:

1. Heater/air conditioner fan speed switch
2. Temperature control knob
3. Heater/air conditioner on-off switch

2-36 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

1. Heater/air conditioner fan speed switch. It is a three-position rocker

switch that controls the fan speed for distributing hot or cold air
throughout the operator’s compartment.
A. Low fan speed (1 dot)

B. Medium fan speed (2 dots)

C. High fan speed (3 dots)

2. Temperature control knob. It controls the air temperature within the

operator’s cab. Turning the knob clockwise decreases the air tem-
perature within the cab. However, turning the knob counterclock-
wise increases the air temperature within the cab.
A. Maximum cold

B. Maximum heat

3. Heater/air conditioner on-off switch. It is a three-position rocker

switch that controls whether the air conditioner or heater is on or
off.
A. Off (neither the heater nor air conditioner is on)

B. Heater on

C. Air conditioner on

Remark
When a machine is not equipped with an air conditioner, the
C position is inoperative.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-37

OPERATION

VENTS
Vents allow fresh air to enter the operator’s cab, without opening a door or window. The operator controls when outside air
enters the cab through the vents. If the outside temperature is moderate, the operator would probably want the vents fully open
to allow fresh air into the cab. However, if the outside temperature is extremely hot, the operator would probably close the
vents to block additional heat from entering the cab. Closing the vents reduces the heat load on the air conditioner and the time
needed to cool the cab interior. And if the outside temperature is extremely cold, the operator would also probably close the
vents to prevent the cold air from entering the cab. Closing the vents reducing the time needed to warm the cab interior. When
closing the vents to outside air, the air within the cab recirculates.

1. Cab Air Recirculation Vents (optional with non air-conditioned

cabs). The plastic louvers can be opened or closed to control the
fresh air delivery to the cab interior.

2. Cab Air Recirculation Vents (standard with air conditioned cabs).

Two knobs (A) control the outside airflow into the cab interior. One
knob is located at the cab’s upper left corner (top photo) and another
knob is located at the cab’s upper right corner (bottom photo). To
open the vents, turn the knobs (A) counterclockwise. To close the
vents, turn the knobs (A) clockwise.

An additional air filter element (B) is located behind the grates,

which the air flows over. Remove these filters and clean as needed.
Operating the machine in dusty environments requires more fre-
quent cleaning of the filters.

2-38 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

OPERATOR’S SEAT

The seat belt is for the operator's safety and should be worn at all times. Before driving the machine,
adjust the seat to the desired position for maximum comfort and machine control, then fasten the seat belt.
Seat belts must be worn across the pelvic region and adjusted snugly to lessen the chance and severity of
injury in the event of an accident. Never fasten a seat belt across the abdomen. Under no circumstances
should the operator be standing in the cab when operating the grader. Do not adjust the seat position while
the vehicle is moving because a loss of control may result. Stop the machine, apply the parking brake, and
then adjust the seat.

RIDGED SEAT (STANDARD)

A slide rail handle (1) adjusts the fore and aft movement of the opera-
tor’s seat. To adjust the seat height, remove the bolts (2) from each cor-
ner. Reposition the seat to the desired height. Reinstall the bolts (2), and
then tighten them.

Remark
The use of a seat belt is recommended for safety.

SEAT BELT (NONRETRACTABLE)

1. End - left
2. Webbing - left
3. Adjustable latch
4. Buckle
5. Webbing - right
6. End - right
7. Latch end

Adjustment
1. Adjust the seat to the desired position.
2. Place the seat belt across your pelvic region (hip bone).
3. Insert the latch (3) into the buckle (4) until a click is heard.
4. Release the buckle lift lever (4).
5. Center the buckle (4) to the operator.
6. Slide the adjustable latch (3) away from the latch end (7).
7. Move the webbing (2) left or right until the belt is snug but not causing any discomfort.
8. Slide the adjustable latch (3) towards the latch end (7) to lock the webbing (2) in place.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-39

OPERATION

SUSPENSION SEAT
The mechanical suspension seat is designed with many adjustments to provide maximum operator comfort.
1. Retractable seat belt
2. Seat backrest tilt latch lever
3. Rear seat height and cushion angle lever
4. Fore-and-aft adjustment lever
5. Weight adjustment knob
6. Armrest angle adjustment nut
7. Front seat height and cushion angle lever

Remark
The use of seat belts are recommended for safety. See “Seat
Belt (Retractable)” for adjustment.

Weight Adjustment
For maximum comfort and protection from vibration it is important that
the suspension is set correctly for your weight.

Turn the adjuster knob (5) until the indicated weight (seen inside the
transparent knob) corresponds to your own weight in pounds (red num-
bers) or kilograms (white numbers). The optimum adjustment is for the
suspension to be in the middle of the vertical stroke--"mid-ride" posi-
tion--when normally seated.

Height Adjustment
After adjusting for weight, the seat height and cushion angle may be
adjusted by lifting levers (3) and (7). The front and rear of the seat are adjusted independently.

Backrest Angle Adjustment

Lift the lever (2) set backrest to desired angle and release the lever.

Fore-and-Aft Adjustment
Lift control (4) slide seat to the desired position. Ensure the mechanism is fully engaged after the adjustment.

Armrests
For easier access to the seat, the armrests pivot upwards and flush with the backrest. To adjust the angle when they are low-
ered, raise the armrest to a vertical position and rotate the adjustment nut (6).

SEAT BELT (RETRACTABLE)

1. Adjust the seat to the desired operating position.
2. Place the seat belt across the pelvic region (hip bone). Engage the buckle in the lock.

2-40 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

SUN SHADE

A sun shade, an option, reduces glare when driving the machine in

bright sunlight. The shade is made of a nontransparent material. Thus,
do not use the shade during adverse weather, like rain, fog, snow, or
night driving.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-41

OPERATION

DOME LIGHTS AND FANS

FRONT DOME LIGHT
A push button switch (arrow) controls the front dome light operation.

Remark
The rear view mirror has been removed so that the switch can
be seen for illustration purposes.

FRONT AND REAR FANS

A three position toggle switch (arrow) controls the front (top photo) and
rear (bottom photo) fans. Moving the switch to the center position turns
the fan off. Moving the switch to the right of center operates the fan at
low speed. Moving the switch to the left of center operates the fan at
high speed.

2-42 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE CONTROL MODULE

The AWD system, an option, controller is located to the left of the oper-
ator’s seat against the rear cab wall. The controller can conduct a self-
test of the AWD electrical system.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-43

OPERATION

INTERACTING CONTROLS
This section details those controls and functions that require interaction with each other.

1. To activate the engine cranking motor:

A. Ignition key must be in the ON position.

B. Transmission gear range lever must be in NEUTRAL.

C. Depress the start button.

2. To release the parking brake once the engine is running:

A. Depends on transmission shifter type:

i. In-line shifter: leave the transmission gear range lever in NEUTRAL.

ii. U-pattern shifter: Move the transmission gear range lever from PARK to NEUTRAL.

B. Set the engine speed control for low engine speed.

C. Place your foot on the brake pedal.

D. Release the parking brake.

E. Shift the transmission gear lever into the desired gear.

When encountering a downhill grade, shift the transmission into a lower gear. Downshifting provides
engine braking. Always consider the slope of the grade and type of terrain.

3. To activate work lights:

A. Turn the head light switch parking lights ON.

B. Turn the desired work light ON.

2-44 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

MISCELLANEOUS GAUGES AND VALVES

HYDRAULIC OIL TANK GAUGE

The sight gauge indicates the level of hydraulic oil inside the tank. At
normal operating temperatures, the oil must be 1.0 in. (25.4 mm) below
the HIGH mark on the gauge.

PARKING BRAKE RELEASE VALVE

The parking brake release valve is used if the grader must be towed.
When the engine is operative and the hydraulic system can release the
parking brake, this valve holds the brake in the released position.

FUEL TANK SHUTOFF VALVE

The fuel tank shutoff valve prevents the fuel from flowing from the tank
to the fuel lines when performing service to the fuel system.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-45

OPERATION

FUEL TANK DRAIN VALVE AND PLUG

Remove the plug and open the fuel tank drain valve to drain the sedi-
ment and water accumulated at the bottom of the fuel tank.

2-46 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

ACCESS COVERS, HOOD SIDES, AND TOOL BOX

FUEL AND HYDRAULIC OIL ACCESS COVERS

Two access covers are provided on top of the rear shell. These covers
swing open towards each other. The covers can be locked to prevent
vandalism to the fuel and hydraulic oil. A decal on each access cover
identifies which tank is below the cover.

ENGINE COOLANT ACCESS COVER

The engine coolant cover on top of the front shell can be locked to pre-
vent vandalism to the engine coolant.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-47

OPERATION

ENGINE HOOD SIDE DOORS

The hood side doors, an option, allow the engine compartment to be
locked, preventing vandalism and theft of engine parts. The hood side
doors have gas props that assists in lifting the doors open. To close the
hood side door, push the safety catch in and then pull the door down.

TOOL BOX
The tool box, which is located on top of the circle assembly, provides
storage for tools needed for daily maintenance. The tool box also pro-
vides storage for scarifier keys after removing the shanks, if so
equipped. A latch allows a padlock to lock the tool box.

Remark
Keep the tool box locked when not in use, especially when
bank sloping.

2-48 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

PRECAUTIONS

PUSH STARTING
The grader cannot be push started because hydraulic pressure is required to engage the transmission clutches.

TOWING
When pulling with a chain or cable, take up the slack slowly to avoid jerking. A chain or cable that fails under load can slip
and cause serious injury. Stand clear. Do not pull or tow the machine, unless the operator's compartment is guarded against or
out of reach of a whipping chain or cable.

Use a trailer or low-boy truck to move a disabled machine. Although towing the machine is not recommended, towing the
machine is permissible if the below warnings are followed.

When using a chain or cable, be sure it is strong enough for the expected load and properly secured to the
tie-down points on the frame or the rear hitch. Do not use the circle tie downs. Provide shielding on the
towing vehicle and towed machine should the line snap.
Try avoiding towing the grader backwards, which can cause the front axle assembly drifting because of
the leaning wheel system. Also, towing the grader backwards can damage the AWD motors, if the machine
is equipped with AWD.
Use the lock pin at the articulation joint to lock the frame in the straight position.
No operator or passengers are allowed on the grader while towing the machine.
With the drive shaft connected, do not tow the grader more than 1 mile (1.61 km) and not to exceed 3 mph
(4.83 km/h). Use a tow bar if towing the grader exceeds 50 ft. (15.24 m).
When towing downhill and a tow bar is unavailable, use a tow line with another machine of equal or larger
size connected behind the towed vehicle to provide braking.
To tow the grader distances more than 1 mile (1.61 km), disconnect the drive shaft companion flange at the
rear and do not exceed 10 mph (16.09 km/h).
Release the parking brake when towing. Before releasing the parking brake, block the front and rear
wheels to prevent the grader from moving.

TOWING A GRADER WITH AWD

The AWD gear box has a one-way clutch. The one-way clutch disengages the AWD motor in forward travel. Therefore, tow-
ing a grader in a forward direction isn’t a problem. However, when towing a grader in a reverse direction, the one-way clutch
locks up and engages the AWD motor. The motor now pumps oil and the engine must be running to lubricate the motor and to
prevent cavitation.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-49

OPERATION

MOUNTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION

When the blade, scarifier and other mounted equipment is operated, special attention must be made not to allow it to interfere
with of components of the unit. Some of these points are shown in the following illustrations.

2-50 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

The “Before Starting Engine” check must never be neglected. Troubles are prevented beforehand by performing this proce-
dure.

Before starting the engine, lock the transmission gear selector in NEUTRAL, apply the parking brake and
lower all the raised equipment. If the machine is idled for an extended time, perform the same steps.
Understand the operation of all controls before starting the machine.

1. Grader is designed to operate in temperatures ranging from -40° F (-40° C) to 105° F (41° C), as long as the unit is filled
with the proper lubricants and the appropriate cold weather starting aids (ether injection system, engine block heater, etc.)
are installed.
2. Always make sure the unit is parked on level ground to ensure that the proper fluid level checks can be made.
3. Walk around the unit and check whether there is any trace of leakage of fuel, oil or water. In particular, high pressure hose
connections and hydraulic cylinders, should be examined.In case leakage is found, inspect the leaking location and stop
the leakage. If leakage is not stopped, contact your distributor.
4. Inspect the tightness of bolts and nuts on every section. When loose ones are found, apply proper torque. Check the con-
nections of the air cleaner and muffler.
5. Check electrical wiring for damage that could result in short circuits. If there is any indication of a short circuit in the elec-
tric wiring, find the cause and correct the problem. Please contact your distributor for investigation and correction of the
cause. Also, check that all connections are tight and clean.

Check the following points carefully.

A. Battery

B. Starting motor

C. Alternator

6. Coolant must be visible in the sight gauge (arrow).

If not, add coolant.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-51

OPERATION

7. When checking the oil level, park the machine on a level surface,
stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes before checking. Remove
the dipstick (lower arrow) and wipe it clean before reinserting it
into its tube. Remove the dipstick again. The oil level should be
between the FULL and ADD marks on the dipstick. If not, remove
the oil filler cap (upper arrow) and pour the specified amount of oil
into the filler tube.

The type of lubricant used depends on the ambient temperature.

Select according to the table “Oil Viscosity Recommendations” in
this manual.

8. Check the fuel level.

9. Remove the plug and open the fuel tank drain valve to drain the sed-
iment and water accumulated at the bottom of the fuel tank.

2-52 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

10. Check that the fuel tank shutoff valve, which is located on the tank
bottom, is open. The valve is show in the open position.

11. The fuel-water separator (arrow) separates the water from the fuel.
Drain the water from the separator. Also, drain the water from the
fuel tank.

12. A clogged air cleaner element causes the red piston of the dust indi-
cator (inset) to reach and the service level. Clean the element (outer
arrow). After cleaning the element, push the button to return the red
piston to its original position.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-53

OPERATION

13. Check and adjust tire pressure. Make sure that tire and rim are free from wear and damage, and that hub nuts are not loose.
14. Check the lamps for switching, dirt, and damage.
15. Check the rear view mirror for positioning, dirt, and damage.
16. Check the horn.
17. Do the instruments function normally?
18. Have any defects which were found during the previous day's operation been corrected?
19. Check the seat belt function.
20. Check the door lock for normal function. (motor grader with cab)
21. Check the windshield wiper, window washer and defroster for normal function. Check the washer fluid level. (motor
grader with cab)
22. Check for missing guards, or protective equipment; do not operate if any are missing.
23. Wear well-fitting helmet, safety shoes and working clothes.
24. When drilling, grinding or hammering, always wear protective goggles.W
25. Never allow grease or other debris to gather on operator's platform. Keep the floor free of tools, etc.
26. Keep the grader clean. Make sure that all tires, blade and breathers are free of built-up material and debris.

STARTING PROCEDURE AFTER EXTENDED SHUTDOWN

If the engine has NOT been started for 30 days or more, prime the fuel system and turbocharger BEFORE cranking the engine.
While an operator can prime the fuel pump, a technician must perform the turbocharger priming.

1. To prime the fuel pump, press the button (1) at least six times.

Remark
Other reasons that fuel system would need priming before
starting the engine:
• Tank runs out of fuel during operation.
• When replacing a fuel filter and it was not filled with fuel
before installation.
• High-pressure fuel lines are loosened or replaced.

2-54 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

PREPARATION FOR ROADING OR JOB SITE OPERATION

After performing the “Before Starting Engine” inspection, determine if the grader will be roaded or operated at the job site
only. Each situation requires that the grader be configured differently.

ROADING CONFIGURATION
1. Position the front tires so that they are in a vertical position with no lean.
2. Position the blade so that it clears the ground and is rotated into a position where it will not interfere with traffic. Use the
following procedure:

Remark
Not effective on graders with blade extensions. Remove the blade extensions and cutting edges.

A. With the blade near the ground, tilt the blade full back.

B. Turn the leading front edge of the blade toward the right front tire. Do not allow the blade to contact any of the tires.

C. Fully retract the circle side shift cylinder.

D. Side shift the blade to the center position.

E. Fully retract the right lift cylinder

F. Level the blade (visually).

G. Angle rotate the blade to be within the tire line, if possible. With a 14 ft. blade and extensions it is not possible to have
the blade within the tire line. Take care to avoid contact with the tires. The flexible mount of the left hand lower step
will be slightly deflected by the blade. The blade should now be in the transport position, with both ends inside the
edge of the front tires. Also, the blade should have about 7 cm (2.75 in.) of clearance with the front right tire and the
front tire of the left tandem case.

H. When articulating, ensure that the tires do not move into the blade.

3. Raise the blade into the roading position.

4. Rotate the beacon light and lock it into the UP (operating) position.
5. Turn the beacon on.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-55

OPERATION

STARTING THE ENGINE

PREPARATION
1. Push the knob (arrow) in to set the parking brake.

2. Set the engine speed control lever at LOW IDLE.

2-56 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

3. Two gear shifters exist: In-line and a U pattern.

A. If the U-pattern gear shifter is used, shift into the PARK posi-
tion to close the cranking electrical circuit.

B. f the in-line gear shifter is used, shift into the NEUTRAL posi-
tion to close the cranking electrical circuit.

4. Turn the key switch to the right (clockwise) to the RUN/START

position.

Remark
Audible alarm will sound until engine is started.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-57

OPERATION

CRANKING METHOD
The cranking method to start the engine depends on the ambient air temperature. Temperatures above freezing allow a normal
start. However, temperatures below freezing require cold weather starting assistance.

NORMAL START
Depress the start button (arrow) and hold it until the engine starts.

Do not crank the engine for more than 30 seconds to avoid damage to the cranking motor. If the engine
does not start within the first 30 seconds of cranking, wait two to five minutes before cranking again.

2-58 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

COLD WEATHER START USING ETHER INJECTION

Ether starting fluid is highly flammable. Follow the precautions on the container. The ether can explode if
sparks or flame contact it, or its temperature exceeds 120° F (49° C). Observe the following precautions:
1. Follow the correct method for starting the engine.
2. DO NOT use the ether injector when the air temperature is above freezing.
3. DO NOT smoke when using the ether starting fluid.
4. DO NOT store fluid containers in the operator's compartment or in direct sunlight. Store the containers in a cool,
well-ventilated place.
5. Keep the fluid containers out of reach of children.
6. DO NOT breathe the hazardous ether vapor.
7. DO NOT let the ether contact your skin because it can cause frostbite.
8. NEVER puncture the fluid container or put it into a fire. Dispose of the empty containers properly.
9. For your safety, remove the ether container when welding, grinding, or using a torch on or near the machine.

1. Depress the accelerator pedal to the full speed position.

2. Push the ether button (arrow) down and hold it while

simultaneously engaging the cranking motor as
instructed in “Normal Start” on the previous page. If the
temperature is below 0° F (-18° C) it may be necessary to
inject additional ether.

Remark
If the engine does not start with a maximum of two ether
injections, determine and correct the cause before attempting
to start the engine.

If the engine will not start or runs roughly, it may be due to one of the following:

A. Air may be in the fuel system. Refer to the “Engine Service Manual.”

B. Ether injector is not functioning properly.

3. After starting the engine, check all instruments and controls for proper operation. Refer to “Operational Controls and
Instrumentation” in this manual.

If adequate oil pressure is not indicated within 25 to 30 seconds after start up, turn off the engine at once
and correct the cause.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-59

OPERATION
4.The method used for cranking the engine depends on the air temperature. Temperatures above freezing permit a normal start. Temperatures below freezing require cold weather starting assistance.

ENGINE WARM-UP
Once the engine is started, allow it to warm up before applying a load. The most favorable clearance between moving parts is
obtained only after all engine parts reach operating temperature.

To warm up the engine, allow it to run from 800 to 1,000 RPM until the water temperature is at least 130° F (55° C) before
engaging a partial load the next 10 to 15 minutes. When water temperature reaches 160° F (71° C), the warm-up is complete
and a full load can now be applied to the engine.

ENGINE WARMED-UP AND RUNNING ABOVE IDLE

Make periodic checks of the voltmeter while operating the machine. The voltage indicator should be from 25.2 to 30.0 volts. If
the voltage drops below 25.2 volts, the alternator may be defective. However, if voltage reading exceeds 30.0 volts, the voltage
regulator may be misadjusted, the battery may be sulfated, or both. Never allow voltage to exceed 30.0 volts, as serious dam-
age to the electrical system could result. Also check:
1. The operation of all control levers, switches, and gauges.
2. That the exhaust gas color is normal.

PUTTING THE GRADER IN MOTION

1. To operate the grader once the engine is running:

A. Leave the transmission gear range lever in PARK.

B. Set the engine speed control for low engine speed.

2-60 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

C. Place your foot on the brake pedal.

D. Release the parking brake by pulling the knob out.

E. Shift the transmission gear range lever into the desired gear.

When encountering a downhill grade, shift the transmission into a lower gear. Downshifting acts as an
engine brake. The slope of the grade and the type of terrain must always be taken into consideration.

Remark
The grader is equipped with a full powershift transmission. This transmission is capable of moving the grader
from 0 MPH (0.00 km/h) to its maximum speed for each gear. Generally, first through fourth gears are for grad-
ing operations, while fifth and sixth are for roading.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-61

OPERATION

EMERGENCY STOPPING

PRIMARY AND SECONDARY EMERGENCY STOPPING SYSTEM

The grader is equipped with a split-braking system to the internal wet brakes incorporated into the final drive. This system uti-
lizes two hydraulic accumulators to ensure that adequate hydraulic pressure is available should the engine or pump fail. This
split system is also designed that if one of the hoses between the brake valve and final drive should fail, the other side will
remain functional. Check the accumulator’s nitrogen charge pressure periodically to maintain a safe braking system.

1. Hydraulic oil tank 8. Lines to steering cylinders

2. Junction block 9. Accumulators
3. Lock pin cylinder 10. Brake check valve
4. Hydraulic oil filter 11. Brake valve
5. Test port 12. Parking brake
6. Steering and brake pump 13. Final drive brakes
7. Steering unit 14. Solenoid valve

2-62 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM

In the event that the primary and secondary emergency brake system
should not function, apply the parking brake (located on shift console).
The parking brake is capable of stopping the unit. Should both the pri-
mary and secondary emergency brake systems fail, lower the blade into
the ground to stop the machine.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-63

OPERATION

PARKING THE GRADER

When parking the machine, park it in a safe place outside the working area.

The following factors should be considered when choosing a parking place: it should be on flat, firm ground where there is no
danger of rockfalls, landslides or floods. If the machine has to be parked on a slope, park the machine facing directly up or
down the slope, and place the chocks under the tires. When the machine is facing downhill, lower the blade so that it cuts
slightly into the ground to further increase the safety.

When parking the machine:

1. Depending if the in-line or U-pattern gear shifter is used.
A. Return the transmission gear range lever to the PARK position,
if the U-pattern shifter is used.

B. Return the transmission gear range lever to the NEUTRAL

position, if the in-line shifter is used.

2. Apply the parking brake by pushing the knob (arrow) in.

Always apply the parking brake when the grader is parked.

3. Lower the blade and any mounted work equipment (dozer blade,
ripper, scarafier, snow wing, snow plow) to the ground. The control
lever lockout is ON (if equipped).

4. Make sure that all tires, breathers, and the blade are free of debris.

2-64 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

TURNING THE ENGINE OFF

Let the engine idle from three to five minutes before shutting it down, allowing the lubricating oil and water to carry the heat
away from the combustion chamber, bearings, shafts etc.

1. Set the engine speed control lever at LOW IDLE.

2. Turn the key switch to the STOP position (counterclockwise).

Remark
Before leaving the machine, lock the transmission gear range
lever in NEUTRAL when the in-line gear shifter is used, and in
PARK when the U-pattern gear shifter is used.

When parking the machine, stop the engine, lock the transmission gear range lever in PARK, apply the
parking brake, turn off the ignition switch, and remove the key.

AFTER TURNING THE ENGINE OFF

Turn the key switch to the ON position, but do not start the engine. Observe the voltmeter. The voltage indicator should be
from 22.0 to 25.2 volts. If the voltage is less than 22.0 volts, the battery may be sulfated, or the alternator or voltage regulator
may be at fault. However, if the voltage is in excess of 25.2 volts, the voltage regulator is defective. Restart the engine and
check the voltage while the engine is running above idle.

Remark
The voltage regulator is compensated to permit the charging system to produce more voltage during cold
weather. Therefore, the voltmeter will show higher readings during cold weather than in warm weather.
Depending on ambient temperature, the voltmeter may require 2 to 3 minutes to move to a steady reading after
turning the key to the on position.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-65

OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

ENGINE

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Engine oil pressure caution Low engine oil. Add the oil to the specified level.
light does not go OFF
immediately after starting Dirty oil filter. Replace the oil element.
the engine. Check oil leakage. Repair any leakage.

Loose or damage wiring and connections. Check and repair wiring.

Engine coolant temperature Low coolant level or wrong protection level. Check coolant level in radiator and/or check
light is on. for leakage.

Loose fan belt. Adjust fan belt tension.

Clogged radiator. Flush cooling system

Damaged radiator fins and/or tubes. Clean or repair the radiator fin.

Engine thermostat not functioning properly. Replace the engine thermostat.

Loose radiator cap or bad gasket. Tighten radiator cap firmly or replace.

Bad temperature sending unit or gauge. Replace engine coolant temperature gauge.

The engine does not start Low fuel. Add fuel.

when the cranking motor is
engaged. Loose fuel line connections. Repair where air is leaking into fuel system.

Bad injection pump or nozzles. Replace injection pump and nozzle.

Valves not properly seating. Check valve clearance.

Valves improperly seating, worn piston rings. Check engine compression.

Faulty wiring. Fuel solenoid. Refer to section on electrical system.

Transmission shift lever is not in Neutral. Move transmission shift lever to Neutral.

2-66 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Exhaust gas is white or blue. Wrong engine oil viscosity. Drain the oil from system and replace
with the correct viscosity oil.

Wrong grade of fuel. Replace with the correct fuel grade.

Exhaust gas occasionally turns Clogged air cleaner. Clean or replace the air cleaner element.
black.
Injection nozzle malfunction. Replace the nozzle.

Valves improperly seating, worn piston rings. Check the engine compression.

Combustion noise occasionally Injection nozzle malfunction. Replace the nozzle.

changes to breathing sound.

Unusual combustion noise or Wrong fuel. Replace with specified fuel.

mechanical noise.
Engine overheating. Correct engine cooling system prob-
lems.

Worn out muffler. Replace the muffler.

Valves improperly adjusted. Adjust the valve clearance.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-67

OPERATION

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Lamp does not glow brightly even Malfunctioning alternator. Replace the alternator.
when engine runs at high speed;
system is below 28V.

Lamp flickers while engine runs. Check for loose terminals and Tighten connections and correct wiring shorts.
open-circuit wiring.

Loose fan belt. Adjust the belt tension.

Unusual noise is emitted from the Worn bearings. Replace the alternator.
alternator.

Cranking motor does not turn when Low battery charge. Charge the battery.
ignition key is ON and start button is
pressed. Inspect and repair wiring.

The pinion of the starting motor keeps Low battery charge. Charge the battery.
going in and out.

Cranking motor turns engine Low battery charge. Charge the battery.
sluggishly.
Worn out cranking motor. Replace the cranking motor.

The cranking motor disengages before Faulty wiring. Check and repair wiring.
the engine starts.
Low battery charge. Charge the battery.

2-68 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

CHASSIS
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION
The engine is running, but Gear range lever. Put directional lever in correct position.
the machine will not move;
Low transmission oil level. Add oil to transmission case to specified level.
parking brake is released.
Clogged strainer and/or screen. Disassemble transmission strainer and clean.
Low charge pressure. Find and fix the cause of low oil pressure.
Pump pressure low. Replace the pump.
Oil leakage from oil line. Tighten the fitting or line.
Defective transmission control valve. Repair the control valve.
Defective transmission gear shifter. Replace the transmission gear shifter.
Machine moves slowly and Low transmission oil level. Add oil to transmission case to the specified level.
lacks power at WOT. Clogged strainer and/or screen. Disassemble transmission strainer and clean.
Loud noise in the power Low oil. Add oil to transmission case and tandem case.
transmitting system.
Both front tires worn. Misadjusted toe-in. Adjust the toe-in.
Heat generation at front Axle bearings not properly adjusted. Adjust wheel bearing installation.
wheel hub.
Insufficient grease. Apply grease.
Front wheels sway while Misalignment of front axle assembly. Adjust toe-in and tie rod.
traveling.
Loose ball joints and spindle bearings. Replace steering linkage.
Air pressure in tires varies from side to side. Equalize tire pressure on each side.
Bent rim. Replace rim.
Uncentered rims on wheels. Check wheel installation.
Loose/worn axle bearings. Tighten front wheel bearing installation.
Steering wheel feels heavy. Low air pressure in front tires. Check the air pressure in both front tires.
Insufficient lubrication. Apply grease on each bearing.
Damaged or bent lines. Repair the piping.
The parking brake doesn’t Glazed brake linings. Polish the brake lining surface with sandpaper.
operate satisfactorily; brake Malfunctioning or misadjusted caliper. Disassemble and clean the caliper.
pads adjusted.
Excessive blade swing Loose ball joints. Adjust the ball joint shim.
during work.
Worn bushings on slide rails. Replace the blade rail and slide bushings. Repair
the blade rail.
Brake pedal does not actu- Worn linings on brake disc(s) Replace the brake disc(s).
ate the brake satisfactorily. Oil leak.
Replace the worn gasket or seal.
Blade vibrates excessively Misadjusted circle shoes and pinion. Adjust the radial clearance of the circle.
while rotating.
Excessive scarifier swing Loose ball joints. Adjust shim of ball joint.
during work.
Work equipment is slow to Improper oil level. Add the oil to the specified level.
respond to controls.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-69

OPERATION

U-PATTERN GEAR SHIFTER

This shifter controls the gear shifting and the parking brake electrical
circuit. This shifter also has on-board diagnostics and a red LED. The
LED flashes error codes to indicate that a problem exists with the shifter
or its electrical circuit.

If the LED flashes, the grader automatically stops moving. Although the
gear lever remains in the selected gear position, the transmission auto-
matically shifts into neutral. Thus, the machine cannot move. Move the
gear selector to the neutral position to coincide with the transmission’s
neutral position.

The reason the LED flashes may be caused by a valid problem or a

“glitch” (one-time occurrence). To determine if the problem is a glitch,
keep the gear selector in neutral for at least 5 seconds to clear the con-
troller’s memory. The transmission should now be able to engage the
gears. Select the desired gear range and continue with the operation. If
the LED flashes again, the problem is valid. Count the number of flashes
the LED emits. The number of flashes equals the error code number.
Look up the error code in the chart on the following page to determine
the corrective action needed.

After repairing the problem, clear the controller’s memory before return-
ing the machine to service.

2-70 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C


ERROR CODE CHART
Error Description
Code
1 Hall sensor failed
2 An output line to the
battery has shorted
3 An output line to
ground has shorted.
4 Signal to the processor
is lost; unknown source
is interrupting.
5 Powering the system
on and off fails to clear
the system.
830B,C 850B,C 870B,C
OPERATION
LED response Length of time in Action
Neutral to clear
the error code
1 flash; 2 second pause 1.5 seconds Replace the shifter.
before the LED flashes
again
2 flashes; 2 second 2.5 seconds Loosen the 24-pin connector at the
pause before the LED shifter with a hex wrench. Turn the
flashes again ignition switch to the ON position.
Using a voltmeter, probe wiring har-
ness pins 7, 8, 12, 13, 18, 19, 20, 21,
22, 23, and 24. If positive voltage
exists at any of those pins, determine
the problem and correct it.
3 flashes; 2 second 1.5 seconds Remove the shifter connector using a
pause before the LED hex wrench. Using a voltmeter, probe
flashes again wiring harness pins 7, 8, 12, 13, 18,
19, 20, 21, 22, 23, and 24 to determine
if there is a short to ground. If so, find
and correct the problem.
3 flashes; 2 second 4.5 seconds Return the gearshift to Neutral. If the
pause before the LED problem does not clear up, replace the
flashes again shifter.
Stays on continually. Will not clear Replace the shifter.
2-71
OPERATION

EXTREME OPERATING CONDITIONS

EXTREME COLD
Operating the grader in extreme cold weather requires certain precautions taken to assure continued normal operation. The fol-
lowing paragraphs detail the checks to be made to be certain the grader is capable of operating at these temperatures.
1. Check the cooling system for correct antifreeze solution for lowest temperature expected. Carefully inspect cooling sys-
tem and correct or report any leaks.
2. Keep batteries fully charged to prevent freezing. If water is added to batteries, run engine at least one hour to mix electro-
lyte solution.
3. Keep engine in best possible mechanical condition to assure easy starting and good performance during adverse weather
conditions.
4. Use engine oil of the proper specifications for the temperatures expected. Refer to the “Lubrication Specifications” in the
engine manual for details.
5. Keep the fuel tank full at all times to prevent condensation from forming inside the tank. Drain any condensation that
should from the tank before and after operation. Drain and service the fuel filter. To eliminate fuel filter clogging due to
wax crystal formation in the fuel, use fuel that has a cloud point specification below the lowest expected temperature.
6. Lubricate entire grader according to “Periodic Service Table and Chart” in this manual or lubrication chart on machine.
7. Start engine and allow it to reach normal operating temperature before applying load.
8. If mud and ice collects and freezes on any of the moving parts while grader is idle, apply heat to thaw the frozen material
before attempting to operate grader.
9. Operate hydraulic units with care until they have reached a temperature to enable them to operate normally.
10. Check all grader controls and/or functions to be sure they are operating correctly.
11. An extra outer air filter element should be kept in the operator's cab to replace element that could become iced and cause
restricted air flow to engine.
12. If a cold weather starting aid is used, see “Engine Starting” (COLD WEATHER START) in this manual.
13. Clean off all mud, snow, and ice to prevent the machine from freezing to the ground. Cover the grader with a tarpaulin, if
possible. Keep the ends of the tarp from touching the ground or the tarp will freeze to the ground.
14. Use the chart below to determine when certain cold-weather starting devices and oils are needed to start the engine during
extreme cold conditions.

2-72 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

EXTREME HEAT
The graders can operate in ambient temperatures up to 100° F (38° C), without loss of performance. Komatsu does not recom-
mend operating graders at a temperature of 115° F (46° C) or above. Continuous operation of the grader in high temperatures
may cause the machine to overheat. Monitor the engine and transmission temperatures and stop the grader for a cooling-off
period whenever necessary.
1. Make frequent inspections and services of the fan and radiator. Keep the coolant level 1.0 in. (25.4 mm) from the top of
the radiator. Check the grills and radiator fins for accumulation of dust, sand and insects which could block the cooling
passages.
2. Formation of scale and rust in the cooling system occurs more rapidly in extremely high temperatures. Change the anti-
freeze each year to keep corrosion inhibitor at full strength.
3. If necessary, flush cooling system periodically to keep the passages clear. Avoid use of water with a high alkali content,
which increases scale and rust formation.
4. Check the battery electrolyte level daily. Keep the electrolyte level above the plates, preventing damage to the batteries.
Recharge the batteries whenever they reach a 1.160 specific gravity reading. Batteries self-discharge at a higher rate if left
standing for long periods in high temperatures. If the grader is to stand for more than several days, remove the batteries
and store them in a cool place.

Do not keep acid storage batteries near stacks of tires; the acid fumes have a harmful effect on rubber.

5. Service the fuel system as directed in “Engine Fuel System” in this manual. Check for water content before filling fuel
tank. High temperatures and cooling off cause condensation in storage drums.
6. Lubricate as specified in “Periodic Service Chart and Table” in this manual or the Lubrication Decal on the machine.
7. Do not park the grader in direct sunlight for long periods of time. When practical, park the grader under cover to protect it
from sun, dirt, and dust.
8. Cover inactive grader with tarpaulin if no suitable shelter is available. Protect the engine compartment, transmission and
hydraulics from the entrance of dust.
9. In hot, humid climates, corrosive action will occur on all parts of the grader and will be accelerated during the rainy sea-
son. Rust and paint blisters will appear on metal surfaces and fungus growth on other surfaces.
10. Protect all unfinished, exposed surfaces with a film of preservative lubricating oil. Protect cables and terminals with igni-
tion insulation compound. Apply paint or suitable rust preventive to damaged surfaces to protect them from rust and cor-
rosion.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-73

OPERATION

EXTREMELY DUSTY/SANDY AREAS

Operation of the grader can cause dust in almost any area. However, when in a predominantly dusty or sandy area, additional
precautions must be taken.

1. Keep the cooling system fins and cooling areas clean; blow out with compressed air, if possible, and as often as necessary.

Wear goggles when using compressed air to blow out particles from radiator fins.

2. Use care when servicing the fuel system to prevent dust and sand from entering the tank.
3. Service the air cleaner at frequent intervals, check air restriction indicator daily and keep dust cup and dust valve clean.
Prevent dust and sand from entering engine parts and compartments as much as possible.
4. Lubricate and perform services outlined on current lubrication chart on machine and “Lubrication Chart and Table” in this
manual. Clean all lubrication fittings before applying lubricant. Sand mixed with lubricant becomes very abrasive and
accelerates wear of the parts.
5. Protect the grader from dust and sand as much as possible. Park the grader under cover, or protect the grader with a tarpau-
lin to keep dust and sand from damaging the unit.

EXTREME HUMIDITY/RAIN
Operation in extremely humid and rainy regions is similar to those in the extreme heat procedure.
1. Keep all exposed surfaces coated with preservative lubricating oil. Pay particular attention to damaged or unpainted sur-
faces. Cover all paint cracks and chip marks as soon as possible to prevent corrosive effects.

EXTREME ALTITUDE
Graders can operate up to 10,000 ft. (3,050 m) in elevation, without loss of performance. When operating at altitudes above
10,000 ft., contact your local Komatsu distributor and refer to the outline for extreme cold.
1. Check the engine operating temperature gauge periodically for engine overheating.
2. Check the radiator pressure cap seal annually, and if an overheating condition exists. The radiator cap must make a perfect
seal to maintain pressure in the cooling system.

AREAS WITH SALT WATER

The corrosive effect of salt water and salt water spray is very extensive. When operating in salt water areas, observe the fol-
lowing precautions.
1. When exposed to salt water, rinse the grader with fresh water as soon as possible. Dry the grader thoroughly.
2. Keep all exposed surfaces coated with preservative lubricating oil. Pay particular attention to the damaged paint surfaces.
3. Keep all painted surfaces in good repair.
4. Lubricate the grader as prescribed on the lubrication chart on the machine or the “Periodic Service Table and Chart” in
this manual. Shorten the lubricating intervals for parts subject to exposure to salt water.

2-74 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

APPLICATION

LEANING WHEELS
The leaning wheels are a distinct help to the operator in keeping the
travel of the machine under control. The wheels should be properly
adjusted for each cut made.

When ditching, a grader blade works at an angle cutting or moving dirt

from right to left. While working, a side draft is created, causing the
front end of the machine to be drawn into the load. One function of the
leaning wheels is to offset this side draft, letting the operator hold the
grader on a straight course. If the front end veers to the right, lean the
wheels to the left just enough to hold the machine on line.

A simple rule for using the leaning wheels, regardless of whether the
machine is on a level surface, in a ditch, or on a bank, is:
WHEN THE FRONT END TENDS TO VEER OUT OF LINE, LEAN
THE WHEELS IN THE OPPOSITE DIRECTION ENOUGH TO
OVERCOME THAT TENDENCY.

LEANING WHEELS ASSIST STEERING

The leaning wheel feature can be used exclusively for steering. When
used in conjunction with the steering wheel, this feature makes steering
right angle turns or backing around to make a Y-turn much easier.

On a level surface, start the grader and stay in first gear while traveling.
With the wheels vertical, the grader can be steered left or right (without
moving the steering wheel) by sharply leaning the wheels right for a
right turn or left for a left turn.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-75

OPERATION

SURFACE WORK
Start with the front wheels vertical. Lean them just enough to offset the
side load against the blade. With a light load against the blade, very little
leaning is necessary. More lean will be necessary with heavy loads.

In working a ditch, the grader is usually working on a slope. Adjust the

wheels to be vertical (in line with the force of gravity), then lean them as
necessary to offset the side draft against the blade to hold the machine
on line. The direction the wheels should be leaned depends on the condi-
tions. If the blade has a tendency to be pulled into the bank, the wheels
should be leaned away from the bank to offset that tendency. If the bank
is hard and there is no blade suction, it is frequently necessary to lean the
wheels toward the bank to hold the blade against it. For example, when
moving material to the left, lean the wheels to the left to stabilize the
front end.

ARTICULATION

Articulation has two definite advantages in grading. First, articulation counteracts a side draft in much the same way as the
leaning wheel feature. Articulation also makes the machine easier to maneuver.

The blade works at an angle cutting or moving dirt from right to left, creating a side draft.A side draft causes the front end of
the grader to be drawn into the load. Articulation can hold the grader on a straight course. If the front end veers to the right,
articulate the rear module to the left just enough to hold the machine on line.

A simple rule for using articulation, whether the machine is on a level surface, in a ditch, or on a bank, is:
WHEN THE FRONT END VEERS OUT OF LINE, ARTICULATE THE REAR MODULE IN THE OPPOSITE DIREC-
TION TO OVERCOME THAT TENDENCY.

2-76 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

ARTICULATION ASSISTS STEERING

Articulation can also be used with the leaning wheels to decreases the turning radius. Using the steering wheel, leaning the
wheels, and articulating the rear module decreases the turning radius (below right).

On a level surface, start the grader and stay in first gear while traveling. With the rear module on center, the grader can be
steered to the left or right, without turning the steering wheel, by sharply articulating the rear module (below left).

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-77

OPERATION

BLADE SUSPENSION OVERVIEW

When the left and right blade lift cylinders are both canted (angled), the
grader is referred to as a right hand and left hand blade suspension. That
means the operator can cut a right or left bank slope.

When just the right blade lift cylinder is canted, the grader is referred to
as a right-hand blade suspension. That means the operator can cut only a
right bank slope.

2-78 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

SADDLE PIN INDICATORS

When working with the right hand and left hand 90° blade suspension
package, indicators are located on each side of the main frame just in
front of the cab. These indicators will aid the operator in locating the
saddle pin positions from 0°, 45° or 90° in bankslope. Use the right side
indicator for a right bankslope, and the left side indicator for a left bank-
slope.

Remark
The indicators shown are with the blade at the 0° (center)
position.

Become familiar with these operations and carefully follow the procedures listed in the following sections.

RECOMMENDATION FOR 45° EXTENDED REACH RIGHT

1. Start with the grader in the standard grading position.
2. Lower the scarifier to a position where there is no interference
between the circle drawbar and the scarifier drawbar and block.
3. Move the blade and shift circle all the way right.
4. Lower the blade to the ground evenly and at an angle of 45° to the
right front tire.
5. Unlock the saddle pin. With the blade on the ground, activate the
saddle pin release switch.
6. Pull the left blade lift lever rearward (retracting cylinder) while
pushing the right blade lift and circle shift lever forward (extending
cylinders).
7. Rotate the pin saddle to the 45° locating hole (do not turn off the saddle pin release switch until the indicator is aligned
with the 45° mark).
8. Exercising caution, alternate between the left (extending) and right (retracting) blade lift cylinders and the circle shift all
the way right (extending shift cylinder) to obtain the desired reach.

Remark
To return to the standard grading position, reverse the above procedure.

9. After rotating the saddle pin to the desired location on right hand
and left hand blade suspension, flip the saddle pin switch to lock the
saddle pin in position (inset).

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-79

OPERATION

RECOMMENDATION FOR 90° BANKSLOPE RIGHT

1. Start with the grader in the standard grading position.
2. Lower the scarifier to a position where there is no interference
between the circle drawbar and the scarifier drawbar and block.
3. Move the blade and shift circle blade all the way right.
4. Lower the blade to the ground evenly and at an angle of 45° to the
right front tire.
5. Unlock saddle pin. With the blade on the ground, activate the saddle
pin release switch.
6. Pull the left blade lift lever rearward (retracting cylinder) while
pushing the right blade lift and circle shift lever forward (extending cylinders).
7. Rotate and pin saddle at 90° locating hole (do not turn off saddle pin release switch until indicator is aligned with 90°
marking).
8. Exercising caution, alternate between the left (extending) and right (retracting) blade lift cylinders and circle shift all the
way right (extending shift cylinder) to obtain the desired reach.

Remark
To return to the standard grading position, reverse the above procedure.

9. After rotating the saddle pin to the desired location on right hand
and left hand blade suspension, flip the saddle pin switch to lock the
saddle pin in position (inset).

RECOMMENDATION FOR 45° EXTENDED REACH LEFT

1. Start with the grader in the standard grading position.
2. Lower the scarifier to a position where there is no interference
between the circle drawbar and the scarifier drawbar and block.
3. Move the blade and shift circle all the way left.
4. Lower the blade to ground evenly and at an angle of 45° to left front
tire.
5. Unlock the saddle pin. With the blade on the ground, activate the
saddle pin release switch.
6. Push the left blade lift lever forward (extending cylinder) while
pulling right blade lift and circle shift lever rearward (retracting cyl-
inders).
7. Rotate and pin the saddle at the 45° locating hole (do not turn off the saddle pin release switch until indicator is aligned
with 45° marking).
8. Exercising caution, alternate left (retracting) and right (extending) blade lift cylinders and circle shift all the way left
(retracting shift cylinder) to obtain the desired reach.

Remark
To return to the standard grading position, reverse the above procedure.

2-80 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

RECOMMENDATION FOR 90° BANKSLOPE LEFT

1. Start with the grader in the standard grading position.
2. Lower the scarifier to a position where there is no interference
between the circle drawbar and the scarifier drawbar and block.
3. Move the blade and shift circle all the way left.
4. Lower the blade to the ground evenly and at an angle of 45° to the
left front tire.
5. Unlock the saddle pin. With the blade on the ground, activate the
saddle pin release switch.
6. Push the left blade lift lever forward (extending cylinder) while
pulling right blade lift and circle shift lever rearward (retracting cyl-
inders).
7. Rotate and pin the saddle at the 90° locating hole (do not turn off saddle pin release switch until indicator is aligned with
90° marking).
8. Exercising caution, alternate left (retracting cylinder) and right (extending cylinder) blade lift cylinders and circle shift all
the way left (retracting shift cylinder) to obtain the desired reach.

Remark
To return to the standard grading position, reverse the above procedure.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-81

OPERATION

CIRCLE DRIVE
The blade on the grader is a full-revolving (360°) with the standard 12 ft.
(3.66 m) blade centered on the circle. Ample clearance is provided
between either end of the blade and the tires.

Remark
When the grader is equipped with a scarifier, the teeth must
be removed to allow 360° blade rotation.

BLADE ANGLE
The circle drive controls the blade cutting angle: the greater the angle, the greater the slicing action; lesser angle gives dozing
action. When the blade is angled, the end which is furthest forward is called the toe and the other end is the heel. Blade posi-
tion for both the right and left windrow is shown below.

2-82 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

BLADE PITCH
The blade pitch is a critical adjustment that the operator can make to
ensure proper movement of the material. Without the proper pitch,
uneven surfaces and cutting actions will result.

The blade to the right is at a steep angle to the ground. This position is
used for:
1. Cutting and moving wet material.
2. Cutting ditches.
3. Spreading windrows.

The blade at the right is at an intermediate angle to the ground. This

position is used for:
1. Grading.
2. Spreading loose material.

The blade at the right is almost at a vertical angle to the ground. This
position is used for:
1. Maintaining sand or gravel roads.
2. Fine grading.
3. Cutting ice from the street

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-83

OPERATION

DITCHING
MARKING CUTS
Ditch line stakes should be set according to plans. The marking cut
should be shallow so as to make it easier to establish a straight ditch line.
This will help to maintain accurate alignment on succeeding heavier
cuts.

For efficient ditching, the blade should be positioned at about a 45°

angle, with the toe of the blade directly behind the front wheel. The
blade should be angled enough to make the desired cut, with the heel of
the blade raised enough to form the windrow either inside or outside the
rear wheels.

Remember to lean the top of the front wheels away from the ditch.

ADDITIONAL PASSES
After the initial ditch line cut, make all remaining cuts count to the
utmost! Apply as much pressure to the toe of the blade as the grader will
smoothly handle in desired gear. Remember to keep the windrow either
inside or outside the rear wheels.

CASTING WINDROWS
After each heavy cut, windrow or spread the material toward the middle
of the road, away from the ditching operation. Do not reduce traction
efficiency and make uneven cuts by trying to operate over the soft, loose
windrows of previous cuts. You will save time in the end by keeping all
material from the previous cuts well out of the way.

2-84 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

BANK SLOPING
After the ditch is made, the bank should be sloped. Position the circle
and blade with the heel resting at the bottom of the slope. Thus, the
material flows inside the rear right tandem wheels as illustrated.

The toe of the blade should be forward and toward the right front wheel.

The tops of the front wheels should be leaned toward the bank (this is an
exception to the rule).

FINISHING THE INSIDE SLOPE

If the ditch is to have a plain “V” bottom (A) you now take a finishing
pass on the inside slope to remove the material from the bank sloping
operation.

If a flat bottom ditch is required, proceed with the remaining portion of

this section.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-85

OPERATION

CUTTING THE FLAT BOTTOM DITCH

1. It is necessary to cut another “V” ditch (1) on the inside slope of the first “V” ditch (2) (see cross section). The blade
should be positioned to move the material out to the top of the road.
2. Cutting the flat bottom requires the blade to be in the maximum extended reach position with the complete length of the
blade placed in the ditch, with the toe of the blade at the base of the bank slope and the heel at the base of the inside slope.
This operation moves the dirt to the inside slope.

MOVING WINDROW FROM THE SHOULDER

One or two final passes, as required, are now made on the inside slope to
move the dirt up onto the road and outside the rear wheels. The shoulder
is now finished, with any remaining material being windrowed or spread
toward the center of the road.

2-86 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

SNOW REMOVAL

Knowing how to remove snow efficiently with a grader is another important job for most operators. For effective snow
removal with a “V” or a reversible one-way plow, allow the plow to ride on its runners and operate the grader at the highest
practical speed. If the grader is equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD), position the “V” or a reversible one-way plow just
slightly above the ground, giving the front wheels maximum traction.

On freshly fallen snow, the initial run should be made down the center of the road. From this opening path, further widening is
done by working the snow back with one side of the plow. As in bank cutting, the front wheels should be leaned toward the
snow bank for the best results.

Another device for clearing roads of snow is a snow wing. It enables the grader to remain on the road while clearing the snow
piled up on the shoulders by the plow. Because of the snow wing’s working height is adjustable over a wide range, it is effec-
tive in pushing back high drifts, especially when articulating (rear steer) the grader.

If snow plowing with the blade, the grader should be equipped with the optional electric float. This option permits the blade to
float free, allowing it to follow the contour of the road and prevent damage to the machine.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-87

OPERATION

ICE REMOVAL
Weather and traffic conditions often result in snow being compacted into
a layer of thick ice over the street. This condition is easily removed with
the grader blade set at a right angle to the line of travel. To cut the ice,
tilt the blade forward to the maximum position and the cutting edge
angled in the dragging (scratching) position.

2-88 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPERATION

MASTER SWITCH

Before servicing the machine, turn the key (2) in the master switch (1) to the off position. If the grader
doesn’t have a master switch, disconnect the negative battery terminal (3). Remove the key. Place the DO
NOT START tag inside the cab at the ignition switch per OSHA and ISO regulations.

The optional master switch (1) is used as a theft deterrent. This switch is located in front of the engine compartment opening
on the right side, inside the front shell weldment. The master switch is connected in series between the battery negative termi-
nal and ground. Turning the key (2) to the OFF position prevents any electrical devices on the grader from operating. Before
starting the grader again, remember to insert the key (2) into the master switch (1) and turn the key (2) to the ON position.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 2-89

OPERATION

2-90 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 3MAINTENANCE

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-1

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE

PRECAUTIONS
GENERAL
• Wear well-fitting helmet, safety shoes and working clothes. When drilling, grinding or hammering, always wear protec-
tive goggles.
• Fuel or oil are dangerous substances. Never handle fuel, oil, grease or oily clothes in places where there is any fire or
flame.
• As preparation in case of fire, always know the location and directions for use of fire extinguishers and other fire-fighting
equipment.
• Always stop the engine before cleaning the machine or adding fuel.
• When working with others, choose a group leader and work according to his instructions. Do not perform any mainte-
nance beyond the agreed work.
• Do not handle electrical equipment while wearing wet gloves, or in wet places, as this can cause electric shock.
• During maintenance, do not allow any unauthorized person near the machine.
• Exhaust gas is dangerous. When working inside, ensure that good ventilation exists.
• Unless you have special instructions to the contrary, always perform maintenance should with the engine stopped. If per-
forming maintenance with the engine running, two men must be present: one sitting in the operator's seat and the other
one performing the maintenance. In such a case, never touch any moving part.
• Always remember that the hydraulic oil circuit is under pressure. When feeding or draining the oil or carrying out inspec-
tion and maintenance, release the pressure first.
• Always use genuine parts for replacement.
• Always use the grades of grease and oil recommended by manufacturer. Choose the viscosity specified for the ambient
temperature.
• Always use pure oil or grease, and be sure to use clean containers.
• When checking or changing the oil, do it in a place free of dust, and prevent any dirt from getting into the oil.
• Use caution to prevent burns when servicing components of the engine or drive train.

3-2 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

DURING MAINTENANCE
• Park the machine on firm, flat ground. Lower the blade, scarifier and ripper to the ground and stop the engine. Return the
gear shift lever to NEUTRAL, and apply the parking brake. Performing maintenance with the blade, scarifier, ripper,
snow plow, snow wing, or dozer blade raised, support them with blocks.
• Lower the ripper to the ground prior to climbing onto the rear fender.
• Thoroughly wash the machine. Clean the filler caps grease fittings and the area around the dipsticks. Be careful not to let
any dirt or dust into the system.
• Hang a caution sign (DO NOT START or MAINTENANCE IN PROGRESS) in the operator's compartment. This step
will prevent anyone from starting or moving the machine by mistake.
• Never use a flame to check for leaks.
• Never use a flame to check the oil level, fuel level, engine coolant level, or battery electrolyte level.
• Immediately remove any oil or grease from the floor of the operator's compartment, or on the handrail. Oil or grease on
the floor of the operator's compartment is very dangerous as someone could slip while on the machine.
• When checking an open gear case there is a risk of dropping things in. Before removing the covers to inspect such cases,
empty everything from your pockets. Be careful when removing bolts and nuts.
• Before draining the oil, warm it up to a temperature of 68° F (20° C) to 104° F (40° C).
• Before removing the radiator cap or the hydraulic oil tank filler cap, wait for the coolant or hydraulic oil to cool down.
Opening the radiator cap or hydraulic oil tank cap immediately after using the machine causes boiling water or hydraulic
oil to spurt out.
• After replacing the oil, filter element or strainer, bleed the air from the circuit.
• When the strainer is located in the oil filler, do not remove the strainer while adding oil.
• After adding oil, check that the oil is at the correct level.
• After greasing, always wipe off the old grease that was forced out.
• When changing the oil or filter, check the drained oil and filter for any signs of excessive metal particles or other foreign
materials.
• When removing parts containing O-rings, gaskets or seals, clean the mounting surface and replace with new sealing parts.
• When raising the work equipment for inspection or repair, always place blocks under the raised work equipment (blade,
dozer blade, snow plow, ripper, scarifier, snow wing, etc.). This step prevents the work equipment from falling on you
while servicing it.
• When the machine is jacked up, always put chocks against the wheels on the opposite side. After jacking up, place blocks
to prevent the machine from falling.
• Disassembly, repair and assembly of tires require special equipment and high skill. Always consult a specialized tire
repair shop.
• Always lock the front and rear frames together before inspecting and servicing the machine.
• When handling the cutting edges, always wear gloves.
• When performing difficult maintenance procedures carelessly can cause accidents.
• If you consider the maintenance too difficult, always request that the distributor perform it.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-3

MAINTENANCE

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CARE

The grader is dependent upon the hydraulic system. The system's life depends upon the hydraulic oil and the care given to it.

The hydraulic system is engineered to function with oil that is available from most suppliers, and is relatively inexpensive. The
grader is factory filled with Dexron III meeting Allison C4 specifications. Complete specifications and optional use of other
oils are listed in the lubrication section of this manual.

Maintain the oil at correct level. Keep the tank screen clean and change oil and filter element at suggested change periods.
When additional oil is required, use a clean container. Clean the tank fill cap and around the tank opening before adding oil.
Dirt is the worst enemy of a hydraulic system, so keep it clean.

A replaceable filter and oil strainer are used in the hydraulic system to filter the hydraulic oil. Replace the filter after 50 hours
of operation for a new machine or one which has had the hydraulic system repaired. Replace the filter every 6 months/1,000
hours of operation, thereafter. Drain and refill the hydraulic oil tank every 2,000 hours of operation. The following procedures
are recommended methods of performing the services required.

3-4 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
Correct lubrication of any machine is of prime importance in prolonging its life. Fuels, oils and greases should be of good
quality and kept free of dirt, water and other foreign materials. In the following specifications and Periodic Service Chart,
proper lubrication instructions are given. It is of utmost importance that good cleaning operations go along with lubricating
procedures.

Have the proper Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE) weights of oil on hand for prevailing temperatures. SAE number sys-
tem classes oil as to its viscosity. This numbering system has nothing to do with any other oil characteristics or properties.
Higher SAE numbers designate heavier or thicker lubricants. Lower SAE numbers indicate lighter or thinner lubricants. All oil
companies have adopted this standard of viscosity.

When draining gear housing cases or engine crankcases, care should be taken to drain when the oil is warm. In following this
procedure, you will find that oil is thinner and therefore drains more completely than when it is cold. The best time to drain
oils is at day's end. In this way, any dirt in the oil will be drained off while it is still in suspension and before it has had a chance
to settle.

The hour meter (arrow) is located on the right side of the operator's con-
sole. This meter records the total number of hours the grader has been
operated. The hour meter should be used along with the “Periodic Ser-
vice Chart and Table,” in this manual to ensure service at recommended
intervals.

Perform service intervals in multiples of the basic hourly service illustrated in the following table.

SERVICE INTERVAL FUTURE SERVICE INTERVALS

REQUIRED

* EACH SHIFT / 10 HOUR SERVICE 10, 20, 30, 40, ETC.

* WEEKLY / 50 HOUR SERVICE 50, 100, 150, 200, ETC.

* MONTHLY / 250 HOUR SERVICE 250, 500, 750, 1000, ETC.

* 3 MONTHS / 500 HOUR SERVICE 500, 1000, 1500, 2000, ETC.

* YEARLY / 1000 HOUR SERVICE 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, ETC.

* BIENNIAL / 2000 HOUR SERVICE 2000. 4000, 6000, 8000, ETC.

THE SAMPLES SHOWN IN THIS CHART ARE FOR EXAMPLE OF SERVICE

INTERVALS ONLY. ACTUAL INTERVALS MAY VARY.

* ALWAYS SERVICE ITEMS BY WHICH EVERY INTERVAL OCCURS FIRST (PERI-

ODIC / HOURLY).

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-5

MAINTENANCE

PERIODIC LUBRICATION
PERIODIC SERVICE CHART

3-6 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

PERIODIC SERVICE TABLE

* = Item not listed on periodic service chart

EACH SHIFT/10 HOUR SERVICE

MECHANIC’S
COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE ABILITY/TOOL
REQUIRED
DRAWBAR BALL STUD PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(GREASE GUN)
CIRCLE SIDE SHIFT CYLINDER PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(R.H. & L.H. 90° BLADE SUSPENSION) (GREASE GUN)
BLADE PITCH CYLINDER PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(BOTH SIDES) (GREASE GUN)
BLADE PIVOT PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(BOTH SIDES) (GREASE GUN)
LIFT CYLINDER CAP PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(BOTH CYLINDERS) (GREASE GUN)
OIL, TRANSMISSION FILL TO “FULL” MARK ON DIPSTICK. 7 GALLONS ATF OPERATOR
(26.5 L) (TWO PEOPLE)
(NO TOOL)
OIL, HYDRAULIC FILL TO 1.000 IN. (25.4 mm) BELOW 16 GALLONS ATF OPERATOR
“HIGH” MARK. (60.6 L) (NO TOOL)
BLADE SLIDE RAILS CLEAN THE RAILS. --------------- DRY OPERATOR
FILM (NO TOOL)
LUBE
COOLANT COOLANT MUST BE VISIBLE IN THE S6D102E-1 COL OPERATOR
SIGHT GAUGE. 8.6 GALLONS (NO TOOL)
ADD COOLANT AS NEEDED. (32.6 L)

S6D114E-1
8.5 GALLONS
(32.2 L)
FUEL THE FILL CAP IS ON TOP OF THE REAR 91.5 GALLONS DF OPERATOR
SHELL. (346.4 L) (NO TOOL)
SEE “ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM” FOR SPECI-
FICATIONS.
FUEL-WATER TRAP OPEN THE TRAP TO DRAIN WATER. --------------- --------- OPERATOR
------ (NO TOOL)
OIL, ENGINE FILL TO “FULL” MARK ON DIPSTICK. S6D102E-1 EO OPERATOR
4.3 GALLONS (NO TOOL)
(16.3 L)

S6D114E-1
5.9 GALLONS
(22.3 L)
AIR CLEANER SYSTEM CHECK THE AIRFLOW RESTRICTION --------------- --------- OPERATOR
INDICATOR. REPLACE THE ELEMENTS ------ (NO TOOL)
WHEN RESTRICTED.
ENGINE FAN BLADE INSPECT THE FAN BLADES. --------------- --------- OPERATOR
------ (NO TOOL)
ENGINE DRIVE BELT INSPECT THE DRIVE BELT. --------------- --------- OPERATOR
------ (NO TOOL)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-7

MAINTENANCE

20 HOUR SERVICE

COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE MECHANICS ABILITY/TOOL

REQUIRED

FILTER, REPLACE THE FILTER AFTER THE --------------- --------- OPERATOR

TRANSMISSION FIRST 20 HOURS ON A NEW MACHINE ---- -- (STRAP WRENCH)
OR AFTER A REBUILD, AND EVERY
250 HOURS THEREAFTER, UNLESS
THE WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT JUS-
TIFIES EARLIER SERVICE.

WEEKLY/50 HOUR SERVICE

COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE MECHANIC’S

ABILITY/TOOL REQUIRED
SCARIFIER CYLINDERS AND PIVOT PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(BOTH SIDES) (GREASE GUN)
LOCK PIN CYLINDER PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(R.H. & L.H. 90° BLADE SUSPENSION) (GREASE GUN)
CIRCLE AND SHOES WITHOUT PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
WEAR PADS APPLY GREASE WITH BRUSH TO (GREASE GUN)
TEETH.
CIRCLE AND SHOES WITH WEAR PADS SPRAY DRY LUBE ON THE SURFACE AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(OPTION) OF THE CIRCLE SHOES. APPLY (GREASE GUN)
GREASE TO THE FACE OF THE TEETH.
PARKING BRAKE SUPPORT PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(GREASE GUN)
LEANING WHEEL CYLINDER PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(GREASE GUN)
TIE ROD & LEANING WHEEL ROD PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(BOTH ENDS) (GREASE GUN)
UPPER AND LOWER STEERING YOKE PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(BOTH SIDES) (GREASE GUN)
FRONT AXLE PIVOT (BOTH ENDS) PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(GREASE GUN)
STEERING CYLINDERS PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(BOTH ENDS OF CYLINDERS) (GREASE GUN)
* FRONT BLADE CYLINDER PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(BOTH ENDS OF CYLINDER) (GREASE GUN)
* REAR RIPPER CYLINDER PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(BOTH ENDS OF CYLINDER) (GREASE GUN)
LIFT CYLINDER TRUNNIONS PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. TWO AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(R.H. & L.H. 90° BLADE SUSPENSION) PLACES EACH SIDE OF MACHINE. (GREASE GUN)
LIFT CYLINDER TRUNNION SHAFTS PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(R.H. & L.H. 90° BLADE SUSPENSION) BOTH SIDES OF MACHINE. (GREASE GUN)

3-8 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

WEEKLY/50 HOUR SERVICE

COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE MECHANIC’S

ABILITY/ TOOL
REQUIRED

OIL, TANDEM CASES CHECK LEVEL AND FILL, IF NEEDED, TO 8.7 GALLONS ATF OPERATOR
THE PLUG OPENING. REMOVE BREATHER (32.9 L) or (COMBINATION
AND REDUCER TO FILL TANDEM CASE. HTF WRENCH/FLEX-HEAD
NUT SPINNER)

LINKAGES, LUBRICATE. AS REQUIRED EO OPERATOR

CONTROL VALVE (NO TOOL)

FILTER, REPLACE FILTER ELEMENT. REPLACE FIL- --------------- --------- OPERATOR

HYDRAULIC OIL TER AFTER FIRST 50 HOURS ON NEW ------ (STRAP WRENCH)
MACHINE OR AFTER REBUILD AND EVERY
6 MONTHS/1,000 HOURS THEREAFTER,
UNLESS WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT
JUSTIFIES EARLIER SERVICE.

OIL, CHECK LEVEL. FILL TO PROPER LEVEL. 0.75 GALLONS GO OPERATOR

CIRCLE DRIVE GEAR CASE (2.8 L) (HEXAGONAL
SOCKET SCREW KEY
FLEX-HEAD NUT
SPINNER)

OIL, CHECK AND FILL TO PROPER LEVEL. TO 0.5 GALLONS HTF OPERATOR
CIRCLE SLIP CLUTCH OBTAIN PROPER OIL LEVEL, CIRCLE (1.9 L)
(OPTION) ASSEMBLY MUST BE PLACED INTO 90°
BANKSLOPE, WITH THE CIRCLE IN A VER-
TICAL POSITION. MAKE SURE THAT LARGE
FILL PLUG ON CIRCUMFERENCE OF CASE
IS IN THE VERTICAL POSITION. FILL HOUS-
ING WITH OIL UNTIL IT IS AT SMALLER
PLUG LOCATED ABOUT 30° FROM FILL
PLUG.

BATTERIES CHECK AND MAINTAIN LEVEL TO TOP OF AS REQUIRED H2 O OPERATOR

RING INSIDE EACH CELL. (SCREWDRIVER)

OIL, REAR AXLE CHECK LEVEL. THE OIL LEVEL SHOULD BE PLANETARY HTF OPERATOR
AT TOP OF ELBOW. THE DIFFERENTIAL 6.5 GALLONS (COMBINATION
HOUSING HAS THREE SUMPS CONNECTED (24.6 L) WRENCH)
BY ONLY A SMALL HOLE. FILL THE CASE
SLOWLY TO ALLOW OIL TO DRAIN INTO NONPLANETARY
ALL SUMPS. 7.5 GALLONS
(28.4 L)

* PARKING BRAKE CALIPER PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(GREASE GUN)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-9

MAINTENANCE

WEEKLY/50 HOUR SERVICE

COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE MECHANIC’S

ABILITY/ TOOL
REQUIRED

OIL, CHECK LEVEL ON BOTH SIDES OF UNIT. 2 GALLONS (7.6 L) ATF OPERATOR
FRONT WHEEL GEAR CASE EACH CASE (COMBINATION
(ALL WHEEL DRIVE) WRENCH)

TANDEM CASE BREATHER INSPECT AND CLEAN. --------------- -------- OPERATOR

- ------ (COMBINATION
WRENCH)

FUEL DRAIN THE ACCUMULATED WATER AND --------------- -------- OPERATOR

SEDIMENT FROM THE TANK. - ------ (ADJUSTABLE
WRENCH)

FILTER, REPLACE FILTER AFTER FIRST 50 HOURS --------------- -------- OPERATOR

REAR AXLE ON NEW MACHINE OR AFTER REBUILD. - ------ (STRAP WRENCH)
DIFFERENTIAL AND EVERY 6 MONTHS/1000 HOURS
THEREAFTER, UNLESS WARNING INDICA-
TOR LIGHT JUSTIFIES EARLIER SERVICE.

100 HOUR SERVICE

COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE MECHANIC’S

ABILITY/TOOL
REQUIRED

OIL, REAR AXLE DRAIN, FLUSH AND REFILL AFTER FIRST PLANETARY HTF OPERATOR
100 HOURS ON NEW MACHINE OR AFTER 6.5 GALLONS (24.6 L) (SOCKET/FLEX-
REBUILD AND EVERY 2,000 HOURS THERE- HEAD NUT SPIN-
AFTER. THE OIL LEVEL SHOULD BE AT TOP NONPLANETARY NER)
OF ELBOW. THE DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING 7.5 GALLONS (28.4L)
HAS THREE SUMPS CONNECTED BY ONLY
A SMALL HOLE. FILL THE CASE SLOWLY
TO ALLOW OIL TO DRAIN INTO ALL
SUMPS. CLEAN SUCTION OIL SCREEN.

3-10 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

MONTHLY/250 HOUR SERVICE

COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE MECHANIC’S

ABILITY/TOOL
REQUIRED

FILTER, TRANSMISSION
REPLACE THE FILTER AFTER FIRST 20 --------------- -------- OPERATOR (STRAP
HOURS ON A NEW MACHINE OR AFTER - ------ WRENCH)
REBUILD. AND EVERY 250 HOURS THERE-
AFTER, UNLESS WARNING INDICATOR
LIGHT JUSTIFIES EARLIER SERVICE.

ARTICULATION JOINT PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
(GREASE GUN)

SUSPENSION ARM PIVOTS, PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
R.H. & L.H. 90° BLADE SUSPENSION (GREASE GUN)
(BOTH SIDES)

REAR AXLE PIVOTS (TWO EACH SIDE) PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. THE SIZE AS NEEDED MPG OPERATOR
OF THE BEARING CAVITY AT EACH PIVOT (GREASE GUN)
IS LARGE. MAKE SURE A SUFFICIENT
AMOUNT OF GREASE IS APPLIED TO THIS
AREA.

BREATHER, TRANSMISSION INSPECT AND CLEAN. --------------- -------- OPERATOR

- ------ (COMBINATION
WRENCH)

BREATHER, CIRCLE DRIVE CASE INSPECT AND CLEAN. --------------- -------- OPERATOR
- ------ (COMBINATION
WRENCH)

COOLANT FILTER/CORROSION CHANGE FILTER/RESISTOR --------------- -------- OPERATOR

RESISTOR - ------ (STRAP WRENCH)

AIR CLEANER SYSTEM CHECK AND TIGHTEN AIR INTAKE --------------- -------- OPERATOR
CONNECTIONS. - ------ (SCREWDRIVER)

COOLANT SYSTEM CHECK HOSES AND CLAMPS. --------------- -------- OPERATOR

- ------ (SCREWDRIVER)

BALL JOINTS CHECK SHIM ADJUSTMENT. --------------- -------- OPERATOR

- ------ (FEELER GAUGE)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-11

MAINTENANCE

3 MONTH/250 HOUR SERVICE

COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE MECHANIC’S

ABILITY/TOOL
REQUIRED

FILTER, ENGINE OIL DRAIN THE ENGINE CRANKCASE AND S6D102E-1 EO OPERATOR
REPLACE FILTER ELEMENT. FILL TO THE 4.3 GALLONS (16.4 L) (STRAP WRENCH)
“FULL” MARK ON THE DIPSTICK.
S6D114E-1
5.9 GALLONS (22.4 L)

3 MONTH/500 HOUR SERVICE

COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE MECHANIC’S

ABILITY/TOOL
REQUIRED

RADIATOR CHECK COOLANT PROTECTION. S6D102E-1 COL OPERATOR

8.6 GALLONS (32.7L) (NO TOOL)

S6D114E-1
8.5 GALLONS (32.2 L)

FILTER, REPLACE THE FILTER ELEMENT, UNLESS --------------- -------- OPERATOR

ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT JUSTIFIES - ------ (STRAP WRENCH)
EARLIER SERVICE.

GEAR CASE, DRAIN AND REFILL. 2 GALLONS (7.6 L) ATF OPERATOR

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE EACH CASE (COMBINATION
WRENCH)

FILTERS, FUEL REPLACE THE FILTER ELEMENTS. --------------- -------- OPERATOR

- ------ (STRAP WRENCH)

FILTER, FUEL TANK DRAIN FUEL TANK AND REMOVE SCREEN --------------- -------- OPERATOR
SCREEN (STRAINER) FROM BOTTOM FOR CLEANING. CLEAN - ------ (ADJUSTABLE
THE SCREEN. WRENCH)

PARKING BRAKE CHECK BRAKE PADS AND ADJUSTMENT. --------------- -------- OPERATOR
LININGS, ADJUSTMENT SEE “PARKING BRAKE ADJUSTMENT” IN - ------ (FEELER GAUGE,
THIS MANUAL. COMBINATION
WRENCH)

WET BRAKE LININGS INSPECT THE BRAKE LININGS. --------------- -------- OPERATOR
- ------ (COMBINATION
WRENCH)

TANDEM CASE CHAINS INSPECT. SEE “TANDEM CASE CHAIN --------------- -------- OPERATOR
INSPECTION” IN THIS MANUAL. - ------ (COMBINATION
WRENCH)

ACCUMULATORS, CHECK CHARGE PRESSURE. REFER TO --------------- -------- SKILLED

HYDRAULIC SHOP MANUAL. - ------ (PRESSURE GAUGE)

3-12 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

6 MONTH/1000 HOUR SERVICE

COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE MECHANIC’S

ABILITY/TOOL
REQUIRED

ENGINE VALVES, ADJUST THE VALVE LASH. CHECK THE FAN --------------- --------- SKILLED
FAN HUB, FAN BELT HUB, BELT TENSIONER BEARING AND ------
AND TENSIONER BELT TENSION.
BEARING

FILTER, REPLACE THE FILTER ELEMENT. REPLACE --------------- --------- OPERATOR

HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER AFTER FIRST 50 HOURS ON NEW ------ (STRAP WRENCH)
MACHINE OR AFTER REBUILD AND EVERY
6 MONTHS/1,000 HOURS THEREAFTER,
UNLESS WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT JUS-
TIFIES EARLIER SERVICE.

OIL, TRANSMISSION DRAIN, CLEAN SCREEN AND REFILL. 7 GALLONS (26.5 L) ATF OPERATOR
(ADJUSTABLE
WRENCH)

DRIVE SHAFT PURGE OLD GREASE WITH NEW. AS REQUIRED MPG OPERATOR
(GREASE GUN)

FILTER, REPLACE FILTER ELEMENT. REPLACE THE --------------- --------- OPERATOR

LOCK/UNLOCK FILTER AFTER FIRST 50 HOURS ON NEW ------ (STRAP WRENCH)
REAR AXLE MACHINE OR AFTER REBUILD AND EVERY
DIFFERENTIAL 6 MONTHS/1,000 HOURS THEREAFTER,
UNLESS WARNING INDICATOR LIGHT JUS-
TIFIES EARLIER SERVICE.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-13

MAINTENANCE

YEARLY/2000 HOUR SERVICE

COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE MECHANIC’S

ABILITY/TOOL
REQUIRED
FRONT WHEEL REPACK BEARINGS BY HAND. AS REQUIRED MPG SKILLED
BEARINGS
(WITHOUT ALL
WHEEL DRIVE)
CIRCLE DRIVE DRAIN, FLUSH AND REFILL. 0.75 GALLONS (2.8 L) GO OPERATOR
GEAR CASE (FLEX-HEAD
NUT SPINNER)
CIRCLE SLIP DRAIN, FLUSH AND REFILL. REMOVE 0.50 GALLONS (1.9 L) HTF OPERATOR
CLUTCH (OPTION) DRAIN PLUG FROM BOTTOM OF HOUSING. (COMBINATION
ONCE OIL IS DRAINED, POSITION CIRCLE WRENCH)
ASSEMBLY AS DESCRIBED FOR NORMAL
OIL LEVEL CHECK. SEE “WEEKLY/50 HOUR
SERVICE” SECTION OF THIS MANUAL FOR
FILLING PROCEDURE.
TANDEM CASES DRAIN, FLUSH AND REFILL. 8.7 GALLONS (32.9 L) HTF OPERATOR
(FLEX-HEAD NUT
SPINNER)
REAR AXLE DRAIN, FLUSH AND REFILL, AFTER FIRST PLANETARY HTF OPERATOR
100 HOURS ON NEW MACHINE OR AFTER 6.5 GALLONS (SOCKET OR FLEX
REBUILD AND EVERY 2,000 HOURS THERE- (24.6 L) HEAD NUT SPINNER)
AFTER. THE OIL LEVEL SHOULD BE
SLIGHTLY ABOVE CHECK HOLE. THE DIF- NONPLANETARY
FERENTIAL HOUSING HAS THREE SUMPS 7.5 GALLONS (28.4 L)
CONNECTED BY ONLY A SMALL HOLE.
FILL THE CASE SLOWLY TO ALLOW OIL TO
DRAIN INTO ALL SUMPS.
STRAINER, REMOVE AFTER DRAINING AXLE, --------------- --------- OPERATOR
REAR AXLE INSPECT AND CLEAN. ------ (COMBINATION
DIFFERENTIAL WRENCH)
OIL, HYDRAULIC REMOVE THE PLUG AND DRAIN TANK. 16 GALLONS (60.6 L) ATF OPERATOR
CLEAN THE SUCTION STRAINER SCREEN. (ADJUSTABLE
REFILL TO THE PROPER LEVEL. WRENCH)
FRONT-WHEEL REMOVE ACCESS COVER FROM GRADER --------------- --------- OPERATOR
DRIVE GEAR CASE BREAST PLATE TO GAIN ACCESS TO ------ (COMBINATION
BREATHERS BREATHER HOSES. INSPECT AND CLEAN. WRENCH)
COOLANT DRAIN, FLUSH AND REFILL. S6D102E-1 COL OPERATOR
8.6 GALLONS (32.7 L) (NO TOOL)

S6D114E-1
8.5 GALLONS (32.2 L)
BATTERIES CLEAN TERMINALS AND INSPECT. --------------- --------- OPERATOR
------ (COMBINATION
WRENCH AND
BATTERY POST
CLEANER)
STRAINER, CLEAN. --------------- --------- OPERATOR
HYDRAULIC OIL ------ (NO TOOL)
TANK
STRAINER, CLEAN. --------------- --------- OPERATOR
HYDRAULIC OIL ------ (WRENCH)

3-14 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

BIENNIAL/2000 HOUR SERVICE

COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE MECHANIC’S

ABILITY/TOOL
REQUIRED

ENGINE VIBRATION CHECK THE ALIGNMENT OF INDEX LINES ON DAMPER HUB (B) --------------- -------- OPERATOR
DAMPER (S6D114E-1) AND INERTIA MEMBER (C). IF THE LINES ARE MORE THAN - ------ (NO TOOL)
0.0625 IN. (1.588 mm) OUT OF ALIGNMENT, REPLACE THE
DAMPER. ALSO, INSPECT THE RUBBER MEMBER FOR DETERIO-
RATION. IF PIECES OF RUBBER ARE MISSING OR IF THE ELAS-
TIC MEMBER IS MORE THAN 0.125 IN. (3.175 mm) BELOW THE
METAL SURFACE, REPLACE THE DAMPER.

NOT SPECIFIED/AS REQUIRED SERVICE

COMPONENTS SERVICE CAPACITY LUBE MECHANIC’S

ABILITY/TOOL
REQUIRED

RADIATOR CLEAN AND STRAIGHTEN FINS. --------------- -------- OPERATOR

- ------ (NO TOOL)

FILTER, CAB AIR CLEAN OR REPLACE FILTER ELEMENT. --------------- -------- OPERATOR
RECIRCULATION - ------ (COMBINATION
WRENCH)

FILTER, CLEAN OR REPLACE FILTER ELEMENT. --------------- -------- OPERATOR

CAB AIR - ------ (COMBINATION
RECIRCULATION WRENCH)
(AIR CONDITIONING)

BREATHER, CLEAN OR REPLACE. --------------- -------- OPERATOR

REAR AXLE - ------ (COMBINATION
WRENCH)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-15

MAINTENANCE

EACH SHIFT/10 HOUR SERVICE

DRAWBAR BALL STUD

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

CIRCLE SIDE SHIFT CYLINDER

(R.H. & L.H. 90° BLADE SUSPENSION)

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

BLADE PITCH CYLINDER

(BOTH SIDES)

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

3-16 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

BLADE PIVOT
(BOTH SIDES)

SERVICE: Purge the old grease with new.

Remark
The grease fitting is recessed into the end of the pivot shaft.
Dirt may fill this recess and the fitting may not appear to be
there. Use a screwdriver to scrape dirt from around the fitting.

LUBRICANT: MPG

LIFT CYLINDER CAP

(BOTH CYLINDERS)

SERVICE: Purge the old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

OIL LEVEL, TRANSMISSION

SERVICE: Remove the dipstick (arrow) and wipe clean. With the
engine running, reinsert the dipstick. Remove the dipstick again and
check that the fluid level is to the FULL mark on the dipstick.

LUBRICANT: ATF

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-17

MAINTENANCE

OIL FILL, TRANSMISSION

SERVICE: Remove the plug (arrow) and pour transmission fluid into
the opening.

LUBRICANT: ATF

OIL LEVEL, HYDRAULIC

SERVICE: Oil temperature must be at least 100° F (38° C) before the
engine shutdown. Park the grader on a level surface with all cylinders
retracted, except the blade lift cylinders (the blade must be resting on the
ground). This action will return the maximum amount of oil from the
hydraulic system to the tank. Shutdown the engine and set the parking
brake and engage the neutral lock. Fill to 1.0 in. (25.4 mm) BELOW the
HIGH mark on the gauge.

LUBRICANT: ATF

OIL FILL, HYDRAULIC

SERVICE: The hydraulic oil tank cap is located under the access cover
(arrow). Clean the area around the access cover before opening it to gain
access to the cap.

LUBRICANT: ATF

3-18 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

BLADE SLIDE RAILS

Apply the parking brake and secure the front and rear frame with the articulate lock pin. Set the work
equipment in a stable condition and stop the engine.

SERVICE: Clean the rails (arrow). After cleaning the rails, spray them
with Dri-Film lube.

COOLANT LEVEL, ENGINE

SERVICE: Coolant must be visible in the sight gauge (arrow). Add
coolant as required.

LUBRICANT: COL

COOLANT FILL, ENGINE

SERVICE: After the engine has cooled, open the access cover, remove
the radiator cap and fill the radiator.

LUBRICANT: COL

Remark
If the radiator cap is equipped with a pressure-release lever,
raise the lever to allow the pressure to escape before remov-
ing the cap.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-19

MAINTENANCE

FUEL FILL
SERVICE: Check the fuel level gauge. If low on fuel, fill the fuel tank.
The fuel tank cap is located under the access cover (arrow) on top of the
rear shell.

LUBRICANT: See “Engine Fuel, Coolant and Lubricants According to

Ambient Temperature” for specifications.

FUEL-WATER TRAP
SERVICE: Due to the precise tolerances of diesel injection systems, it
is extremely important the fuel be kept clean and free of water. Dirt or
water in the system can cause severe damage to both the injection pump
and the injection nozzles. With the engine off, turn the valve (arrow)
counterclockwise 1.5 to 2 turns to open the drain. Drain the filter sump
of water until clear fuel appears. Turn the valve (arrow) clockwise to
close the drain. Do not overtighten the valve or the threads can be dam-
aged.

OIL LEVEL, ENGINE

SERVICE: Check the oil level using the dipstick (lower arrow). Oil
level should be to the FULL mark on the dipstick. If needed, remove the
oil filler cap (upper arrow) and pour in more oil.

LUBRICANT: EO

3-20 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

AIR CLEANER SYSTEM

SERVICE: Check the air restriction indicator (inset). When it shows
red, replace the element (lower arrow).

To prevent the entrance of dirt into the engine, periodic inspections of

the air cleaner hoses, elbows, and piping connections between the mani-
fold and the air cleaner are essential. Hose connections should be
replaced before deterioration. To eliminate undue strain on the piping
and connections, make sure all the components are aligned properly. See
that all joints, including flexible connections and manifold gaskets,
between the air cleaner and engine manifold are tight. Be sure that the
manifold stud bolts are torqued to the specified torque values.

The cleaner is provided with an air intake cap screen (on top of air intake stack) to prevent large objects (chaff, leaves, etc.)
from entering the air cleaner. Keep this inlet screen clean. The holes must be kept open and free from paint. Dust, oil, or water
may collect on the screen and clog the holes enough to restrict the flow of air to the engine. Restricted airflow will reduce the
power delivered by the engine.

The air intake pipe from intake cap to air cleaner should not be allowed to collect dirt on the inside. Clean this pipe when the
air cleaner is removed. At the same time, clean the inlet tube to the air cleaner.

This system uses two filters: one large primary filter and a smaller secondary or safety filter. The secondary filter protects the
engine in case of damage to the primary filter and also guards the engine during servicing of primary filter. If after changing
the primary filter and the air service indicator still shows red, change the secondary filter.

The air cleaner supplied as standard equipment requires Daily/10 Hours service; more often under severe operating conditions.

Remark
Two different air filter assemblies exist: one for S/N 210568 AND UP, and one for S/N 210567 AND DOWN. The
service procedure, which are on the following pages, for each one varies. Pay attention to the torque requirements when
reassembling.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-21

MAINTENANCE

FILTER, AIR — S/N 210568 AND UP

1. Stop the engine.
2. Remove the vacuator (1) from the air cleaner housing (2).
3. Inspect the vacuator seal lips for proper sealing. If the lips are dete-
riorated or hardened, the vacuator will not function correctly and
result in possible build up of dust in the air cleaner dust cup. Clean
the cup before assembly. Check the condition of the sealing ring on
the air cleaner body.
4. Remove the wing nut (3) with the cover (4) and gasket (5) from the
housing (2). Inspect the gasket and replace it if necessary.

Remark
The wing nut (3) secures the cover (4) with the retainer (6).

5. Remove the wing nut assembly (7) holding the outer (primary) ele-
ment (8) in housing (2). Remove the outer (primary) element by
pulling it straight out of the housing.

Remark
Remove the inner (secondary) element (10) after every third
outer (primary) element change and/or cleaning.

6. Remove the wing nut assembly (9) that secures the inner (second-
ary) element (10) in housing (2). Use care when removing element
from housing not to dislodge any contaminants into the air intake pipes and elbows. Remove the wing nut (3) with cover
(4) and gasket (5) from housing (2). Inspect gasket and replace if necessary.
7. Remove the wing nut assembly (7) that holds the outer (primary) element (8) in the housing (2). Remove the outer (pri-
mary) element by pulling it straight out of the housing.
8. Remove the wing nut assembly (9) that secures the inner (secondary) element (10) in the housing (2). Use care when
removing the element from the housing so as not to dislodge any contaminants into the air intake pipes and elbows.

Do not wash the inner (secondary) filter element. Discard it and replace with a new one. Do not use com-
pressed air to clean inside of the air cleaner housing.

9. Clean the internal portion of the air cleaner housing (2) thoroughly with a dry cloth. Clean the air inlet cap and inlet pipe.
Replace the components in reverse order, making certain that all parts are correctly installed and seals are in good condi-
tion for proper sealing.

Remark
Torque the end cover and internal retaining hardware to 40 ±5 lbf in. (0.5 ±0.1 kg•m).

10. A tight, positive seal must be made between the dust cup and the cleaner after every servicing. Leakage at this point will
increase dust loading and make it necessary to service filter elements more often. It is recommended that replacement gas-
kets be kept in stock at all times because of dust cup servicing and the possibility of gasket damage.
Excessive exhaust smoke and/or loss of power may indicate need for filter element service. If equipment is available,
measure the air restrictions of the cleaner with a vacuum gauge or water manometer at available restrictions taps in the
induction system. Service is required when air restriction has increased to maximum allowable limits as established by the
engine manufacturer. Replace the tap plug securely after measuring.

3-22 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

FILTER, AIR — S/N 210567 AND DOWN

1. Stop the engine.

2. Remove the vacuator (1) from the air cleaner housing (2).
3. Inspect the vacuator seal lips for proper sealing. If the lips are deteriorated or hardened, the vacuator will not function cor-
rectly and result in possible build up of dust in the air cleaner dust cup. Clean the cup before reassembly.
4. Remove the wing nut (3) and then the cover (4) from the housing (2).
5. Remove the wing nut (5) and washer (6) holding the outer (primary) element (7) in the housing (2). Remove the outer ele-
ment (7) by pulling it straight out of the housing (2).
6. Remove the nut (8) and washer (9) that secure the inner (secondary) element (10) in the housing (2). When removing the
element from the housing, be careful not to dislodge any contaminants into the air intake pipes and elbows.

Do not wash the inner (secondary) filter element. Discard it and replace with a new one. Do not use com-
pressed air to clean inside of the air cleaner housing.

7. Clean the internal portion of the air cleaner housing (2) thoroughly with a dry cloth. Clean the air inlet cap and inlet pipe.
Replace the components in reverse order, making certain that all parts are correctly installed and seals are in good condi-
tion for proper sealing.
8. Reverse the order to reassemble. During reassembly:
A. Install new gaskets (6, 9).
B. Torque the nut (8) from 200 to 220 in. lbs. (22.6 to 24.8 Nm)
C. Torque the wingnut (5) from 30 to 40 in. lbs. (3.4 to 4.5 Nm)

9. A tight, positive seal must be made between the dust cup and the cleaner after every servicing. Leakage at this point will
increase dust loading and make it necessary to service filter elements more often. It is recommended that replacement gas-
kets be kept in stock at all times because of dust cup servicing and the possibility of gasket damage.
Excessive exhaust smoke and/or loss of power may indicate need for filter element service. If equipment is available,
measure the air restrictions of the cleaner with a vacuum gauge or water manometer at available restrictions taps in the
induction system. Service is required when air restriction has increased to maximum allowable limits as established by the
engine manufacturer. Replace the tap plug securely after measuring.

Remark
Inspect the vacuator after installation is complete. The slot in the vacuator is to run parallel to the engine com-
partment, keeping the dust from entering the air intake system.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-23

MAINTENANCE

FILTER, AIR — ELEMENT CLEANING

Although filter elements are normally considered expendable, proper and careful cleaning can extend their life several times.
Maintenance schedules will depend upon the conditions in which the engine operates. Normally, replace the filter element
after 1, 000 Hours of operation.

CLEANING WITH COMPRESSED AIR

Direct a jet of clean, dry air from the inside of the filter element perpendicular to the pleats.Move the air jet up and down along
pleats, slowly rotating the element, until no more dust is being removed.

Air nozzle pressure must not exceed 30 psi (2.1 kg/cm²). Always wear goggles when using compressed air.

CLEANING WITH WATER

Filter element can be cleaned by washing with water and a good nonsudsing detergent. First, direct a jet of clean, dry air from
inside of the element. When the loose dust and soot have been removed, the element is ready to be washed. With detergent and
water solution at about 100° F (38° C), soak the element in the solution for at least 15 minutes. Then, agitate the element for
about two (2) minutes to loosen the dirt. Rinse the element with clean water until water is clear coming from element. Water
hose pressure should not exceed 40 psi (2.8 kg/cm2). Air dry the element thoroughly before using.

Remark
It is not recommended that the inner (secondary) element be cleaned in water.

INSPECTING THE CLEANED FILTER ELEMENT

After cleaning the filter element, inspect the element for damage. A good method to detect ruptures in the element is to place a
light inside the element and look toward the light from the outside of the filter. Any hole in the element, even the smallest, will
pass dust to the engine and cause unnecessary engine wear.

3-24 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

ENGINE FAN BLADE

SERVICE: Inspect the fan blades for cracks, bends, and loose or miss-
ing rivets. Replace the engine fan if any of the listed conditions are
found.

ENGINE DRIVE BELT

SERVICE: Inspect the drive belt for longitudal cracks. Replace the
drive belt if longitudal cracks are found.

Replace badly worn, greasy, or severely cracked belts immediately.

These conditions prevent proper belt function. Visually inspect the belt.
Check the belt for intersecting cracks. Transverse (across the belt width)
cracks are acceptable. Longitudinal (direction of belt length) cracks that
intersect with transverse cracks are not acceptable. Replace the belt if it
is frayed or has pieces missing.

Before installing the new belts, make sure all pulley grooves are clean
and not worn. Replace the pulley, if damaged, or if the grooves are worn.

All pulley support bearings, shafts, and brackets must be in working order.

When replacing belts and pulleys, pulley alignment must be checked with the belts tensioned and brackets securely clamped.
A misaligned pulley is detrimental to belt performance.

Do not force the belts into the pulley grooves by prying with a screwdriver or pry bar. This will damage the belt side cords
which will cause the belts to turn and result in complete destruction of the belts in operation.

Belts on new machines and replacement belts lose their tension as they seat into the pulley grooves. Check the tension of new
belts at 20 hour intervals. Once the belt tension is stabilized, check it every 200 hours. If the tension falls below the required
minimum, the belt will slip and damage the belts and pulley grooves.

Remark
When operating in abrasive conditions, check the belt tension every 100 hours.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-25

MAINTENANCE

BELT TENSION, A/C

Adjust the a/c compressor belt tension to 121 +/- 5 lbs. Check that the
pulleys are not misaligned more than 0.060 in. (1.5 mm) per 1 ft. (30.48
cm) span between the pulleys. Maximum deflection at point “A” (right)
should be 0.25 in. (6.35 mm). After “run in” and with the belt hot, belt
tension should be 50 lbs. (22.68 kg). Retension the belt, if below 50lbs.
(22.68 kg). If the belt is cold, retension to 90 lbs. (40.82 kg).

BELT TENSION, DIFFERENTIAL PUMP

With the belt-tension gauge from Kent-Moore, p/n BT-3373, depress the
ball (1) so that the hook (2) engages the belt. Release the ball (1) with a
quick motion. Read the unit of direct tension on the dial face that aligns
with the indicating bar on the belt gauge body (3). The reading should be
from 15 to 20 lbs.

Remark
Do not let the ball (1) snap back quickly when the gauge is off
the belt, or the gauge may be damaged.

BELT TENSION, DIFFERENTIAL PUMP —

ALTERNATE METHOD
If the above gauge is unavailable, the maximum deflection at point A
should be 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) before “run in.” After the belt is run in,
maximum deflection at point A should be 0.38 in. (9.65 mm).

3-26 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

BELT TENSION, KOMATSU S6D114E-1 AND S6D102E-1 ENGINES

The Komatsu engine has an automatic belt tensioner that maintains the correct tension on the drive belt. To check the belt ten-
sion, use a Gates-type gauge because of the belt width. Proper tension should be from 80 to 100 lbf (360 to 490 N).

Remark
Refer to the “Engine Service Manual” for latest specification and recommendations.

With the automatic belt tensioner, no adjustment is required. However, if the belt has insufficient tension, the automatic belt
tensioner is defective and must be replaced.

To replace the drive belt, place a 3/8 in. drive ratchet in the square hole in the belt tensioner. Push the ratchet UP to loosen the
tensioner. Remove the old belt and install the new one.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-27

MAINTENANCE

20 HOUR SERVICE

FILTER, TRANSMISSION OIL

SERVICE: Replace the filter (arrow) after the first 20 Hours on a new
machine or after a rebuild, and every 250 Hours thereafter, unless warn-
ing indicator light justifies earlier service.

Remark
In cold weather operation and/or initial startup (when the transmis-
sion oil is cold) the oil will have a higher viscosity which may allow
the filter to bypass intermittently. When this situation occurs, the fil-
ter bypass indicator light will turn on. When it does turn on, check
the converter out oil temperature. If the temperature is in normal
working range, change the filter. If the converter out oil temperature
is below the normal working range, stop the machine and stall the
converter until the oil warms to the normal working temperature. If stalling the converter disarms the system, work the
transmission to a higher gear to keep the converter oil temperature in the normal working range. If this step does not dis-
arm the system, change the filter.

3-28 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

WEEKLY/50 HOUR SERVICE

SCARIFIER CYLINDERS AND PIVOT

(BOTH SIDES)

SERVICE: Purge the old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

LOCK PIN CYLINDER

(R.H. & L.H. 90° BLADE SUSPENSION)

SERVICE: Purge the old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

CIRCLE AND SHOES

SERVICE: Apply grease to the teeth. When equipped with replaceable
wear pads, apply dry film lube to the inner and upper inner circumfer-
ence of the circle gear.

LUBRICANT: MPG

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-29

MAINTENANCE

LEANING WHEEL CYLINDER

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

TIE ROD AND LEANING WHEEL ROD

(BOTH ENDS)

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

UPPER AND LOWER STEERING YOKE

(BOTH SIDES)

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

3-30 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

FRONT AXLE PIVOT

(BOTH ENDS)

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

STEERING CYLINDERS
(BOTH ENDS OF CYLINDERS)

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

LIFT CYLINDER TRUNNIONS

(R.H. & L.H. 90° BLADE SUSPENSION)

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new. Two places each side of
machine.

LUBRICANT: MPG

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-31

MAINTENANCE

LIFT CYLINDER TRUNNION SHAFTS

(R.H. & L.H. 90° BLADE SUSPENSION)

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new on both sides of the machine.

LUBRICANT: MPG

DOZER BLADE CYLINDER

(BOTH ENDS)

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new. Both sides of machine.

LUBRICANT: MPG

RIPPER CYLINDER
(BOTH ENDS)

SERVICE: Purge the old grease with new on both sides of the machine.

LUBRICANT: MPG

3-32 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

OIL LEVEL, TANDEM CASES

SERVICE: Remove the plug (arrow) and check that the oil level is to
the bottom of the threads.

Remark
Graders with s/n 203590 and up are filled with HTF from the
factory while earlier graders were filled with ATF. If the tan-
dem case is filled with ATF, use it to top off the fluid level, but
change to HTF at the scheduled fluid change to ensure long
chain life.

LUBRICANT: ATF or HTF (see note above)

OIL FILL, TANDEM CASES

SERVICE: Remove the breather and reducer (arrow) to fill the tandem
case until oil flows from the oil level plug hole.

Remark
Graders with s/n 203590 and up are filled with HTF from the
factory while earlier graders were filled with ATF. If the tan-
dem case is filled with ATF, use it to top off the fluid level.
However, change to HTF at the next scheduled fluid change
to ensure long chain life.

LUBRICANT: ATF or HTF (see note above)

OIL LEVEL, FRONT WHEEL GEAR CASE

(ALL WHEEL DRIVE)

SERVICE: With the bolt (arrow) at the 11 o’clock position, remove it.
The oil level should be to the bottom of the threads. Check both sides of
the unit.

Remark
Oil must not have a contaminant level higher than 1000 parti-
cles larger than 10 Micro Meters per cubic centimeter based
on ANSI B93.28-1973 Calibration Procedure.

LUBRICANT: ATF

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-33

MAINTENANCE

CONTROL LEVER LINKAGES

SERVICE: Lubricate.

LUBRICANT: EO

CONTROL VALVE LINKAGES

SERVICE: Lubricate.

LUBRICANT: EO

FILTER, HYDRAULIC OIL

SERVICE: The filter (arrow) is located under the hydraulic oil tank. A
small elbow and cap is provided for draining the filter return hose before
unscrewing the oil filter. Replace the filter after the first 50 hours on a
new machine or after a rebuild. And every 6 months/1000 hours thereaf-
ter, unless the warning indicator light justifies earlier service. Check the
hydraulic tank oil level and add oil as needed.

3-34 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

OIL LEVEL, CIRCLE DRIVE GEAR CASE

SERVICE: Remove the plug (arrow) and check that the oil level is to
the bottom of the threads.

Remark
Oil must not have a contaminant level higher than 1000 parti-
cles larger than 10 Micro Meters per cubic centimeter based
on ANSI B93.28-1973 Calibration Procedure.

LUBRICANT: GO

OIL FILL, CIRCLE DRIVE GEAR CASE

SERVICE: Remove the plug (arrow) and fill until oil flows from the oil
level check hole (20.3.19).

Remark
Oil must not have a contaminant level higher than 1,000 particles
larger than 10 Micro Meters per cubic centimeter based on ANSI
B93.28-1973 Calibration Procedure.

LUBRICANT: GO

PARKING BRAKE CALIPER

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-35

MAINTENANCE

OIL LEVEL AND FILL, CIRCLE SLIP

CLUTCH
SERVICE: To obtain the proper oil level, position the circle assembly
into a 90° bankslope, with the circle in a vertical position. Make sure
that large fill plug (right arrow) on the circumference of the case is in the
vertical position. If oil is needed, remove the plug (left arrow) located
approximately 30° from the fill plug. Fill the housing with oil until it
flows from the plug hole (left arrow).

Remark
Oil must not have a contaminant level higher than 1000 parti-
cles larger than 10 Micro Meters per cubic centimeter based
on ANSI B93.28-1973 Calibration Procedure.

LUBRICANT: HTF

When checking the circle slip clutch oil level, make sure that the circle is properly supported by blocking.
Do not use the blade or circle assembly cylinders for the only support.

OIL LEVEL, REAR AXLE

SERVICE: Remove the cap at the elbow (arrow). The oil level should
be at the top of the elbow. The differential housing has three sumps con-
nected by only a small hole. Fill the case slowly to allow the oil to drain
into all sumps.

Remark
Oil must not have a contaminant level higher than 1,000 parti-
cles larger than 10 Micro Meters per cubic centimeter based
on ANSI B93.28-1-973 Calibration Procedure.

LUBRICANT: HTF

3-36 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

OIL FILL, REAR AXLE

SERVICE: With the elbow cap removed, remove the fill plug (arrow).
Fill the unit until oil flows out the elbow.

Remark
Oil must not have a contaminant level higher than 1000 parti-
cles larger than 10 Micro Meters per cubic centimeter based
on ANSI B93.28-1-973 Calibration Procedure.

LUBRICANT: HTF

BATTERIES
SERVICE: Check and maintain level to top of ring inside each cell.

LUBRICANT: DISTILLED WATER

Remark
See “Batteries” in this section of this manual for servicing.

BREATHER, TANDEM CASE

SERVICE: Inspect and clean.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-37

MAINTENANCE

DRAIN, FUEL TANK

SERVICE: Remove the plug from the end of the hose and open the
valve. Drain accumulated water and sediment. The life of fuel pump and
injectors can be considerably extended if the operator takes this precau-
tion. If an excessive amount of water appears in the fuel consistently,
check the fuel storage and discuss this problem with the fuel supplier
immediately.

FILTER, DIFFERENTIAL OIL

SERVICE: Replace the filter (arrow) after the first 50 Hours on a new
machine or after a rebuild, and every 6 Months/1000 Hours thereafter,
unless warning indicator light justifies earlier service.

3-38 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

100 HOUR SERVICE

OIL CHANGE, REAR AXLE

SERVICE: Remove the drain plug (arrow), and allow oil to drain, flush
and refill with fresh rear axle oil. Perform this step after the first 100
Hours on a new machine or after a rebuild, and every 2,000 Hours there-
after. The oil level should be slightly above the check hole. The differen-
tial housing has three sumps connected by only a small hole. Fill the
case slowly to allow oil to drain into all sumps.

Remark
Oil must not have a contaminant level higher than 1,000 parti-
cles larger than 10 Micro Meters per cubic centimeter based on ANSI B93.28-1973 Calibration Procedure.

LUBRICANT: HTF

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-39

MAINTENANCE

MONTHLY/250 HOUR SERVICE

ARTICULATION JOINT
SERVICE: Purge old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

SUSPENSION ARM PIVOTS

(R.H. & L.H. 90° BLADE SUSPENSION)
(BOTH SIDES)

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

COOLANT SYSTEM
SERVICE: Check hoses and clamps.

3-40 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

REAR AXLE PIVOTS

(TWO EACH SIDE)

SERVICE: Purge old grease with new. The size of the bearing cavity at
each pivot is large. Make sure a sufficient amount of grease is applied to
this area.

LUBRICANT: MPG

FILTER, TRANSMISSION OIL

SERVICE: Replace the filter (arrow) after the first 20 Hours for a new
machine or after rebuild. Thereafter, replace the filter every 250 Hours,
unless the warning indicator light justifies earlier service.

Remark
In cold weather operation and/or initial startup (when the
transmission oil is cold) the oil will have a higher viscosity
which may allow the filter to bypass intermittently. When this
happens, the filter bypass indicator light will be activated. If
this situations happens, check the converter out oil tempera-
ture. If the temperature is in normal working range, the filter
must be changed. If the converter out oil temperature is below
the normal working range, stop the machine and stalling the converter to warm the oil to the normal working
temperature. If this step disarms the system, work the transmission to a higher gear to keep the converter oil
temperature in the normal working range. If this does not disarm the system, change the filter.

BREATHER, TRANSMISSION
SERVICE: Inspect and clean.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-41

MAINTENANCE

BREATHER, CIRCLE DRIVE GEAR CASE

SERVICE: Inspect and clean.

FILTER, COOLANT CORROSION RESISTOR

(S6D114E-1 ENGINE ONLY)

SERVICE: Change the filter/resistor (arrow).

AIR CLEANER SYSTEM

SERVICE: Check and tighten the air intake connections.

3-42 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

BALL JOINTS
SERVICE: Check the shim adjustment.

The ball and socket joints (arrow) on the blade lift, the circle shift, the
blade pitch cylinders, and the drawbar are adjustable for wear.

To make adjustments of any ball and socket, remove the bolts or cap
screws and hex nuts with washers. Remove the shims to eliminate free
play in joints. Joints should never bind, but must work freely.

Refer to the shop manual for the recommended free play tolerances.

When making any shim adjustments relating to the circle assembly be sure that it is resting solidly on the
ground before disconnecting any supporting members.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-43

MAINTENANCE

3 MONTHS/250 HOUR SERVICE

Hot oil can burn the skin.

When draining the engine oil, affix a tag in a clearly visible spot in the operator's compartment warning
personnel not to start the engine.

OIL CHANGE, ENGINE

Drain the oil when it is hot because all contaminants are suspended in
the oil. Engine coolant temperature must be at least 140° F (60° C).

To drain the oil: Turn the engine off. Clean the area surrounding the
drain plug and hose (arrow). Place a pan under the drain outlet and
remove the oil drain plug. After completely draining the oil, clean and
replace the drain plug. Tighten it to 60 lbf. ft. (8.3 kg•m).

Do not overfill the crankcase. Excess oil causes foaming and can cause loss of lubrication and higher
operating temperatures, resulting in engine damage.

To add oil: Add fresh oil as necessary to bring the oil to the FULL mark
on the dipstick. Disconnect the electrical wire from the fuel pump sole-
noid valve. Using the cranking motor, rotate the crankshaft until oil pres-
sure appears on the gauge. Connect the electrical wire to the fuel pump
solenoid valve. Start the engine.Operate the engine at idle and inspect
for leaks. Stop the engine. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes to let the oil
drain from the upper parts of the engine. Check the oil level again. Refer
to “Engine Startup Procedure”. Check for oil leaks after starting the
engine.

3-44 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

FILTER, ENGINE OIL

The location of the oil filter for the 850 and 870 graders (top) is slightly
different from the 830 (bottom).
The oil filter (arrow) keeps the circulating oil free from harmful contam-
inants. Engine oil filters must be replaced when the engine oil is
changed. The oil filter is a spin-on type. This filter cannot be cleaned;
replace it.
To change the oil filter: Clean the area around the oil filter and head.
Spin the oil filter (arrow) off and discard it. Thoroughly clean the filter
gasket mounting surface of the head. The O-ring can stick on the filter
head. Ensure that the O-ring is removed before installing the new filter.
Apply a thin film of clean oil to the O-ring on the new filter. Holding the
filter upright, fill it with clean oil before installing it. Spin the element
on by hand until the O-ring just touches the mounting surface. Tighten the filter an additional 1/4 to 3/4 turn, but do not over-
tighten.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-45

MAINTENANCE

3 MONTHS/500 HOUR SERVICE

COOLANT FILL, ENGINE

SERVICE: After opening coolant cover, remove the radiator cap and
fill with coolant.

LUBRICANT: CO

Remark
If the radiator cap is equipped with a pressure-release lever,
raise the lever to allow pressure to escape before removing
the cap.

FILTER, ALL- WHEEL-DRIVE OIL

SERVICE: Replace the filter element (arrow), unless the warning indi-
cator light justifies earlier service.

OIL CHANGE, FRONT-WHEEL-DRIVE GEAR

SERVICE: With the bolt (arrow) at the 6 o’clock position, remove the
bolt and drain the fluid. Refill the case with fresh fluid.

Remark
Oil must not have a contaminant level higher than 1000 parti-
cles larger than 10 Micro Meters per cubic centimeter based
on ANSI B93.28-1973 Calibration Procedure.

LUBRICANT: ATF

3-46 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

FILTER, FUEL
SERVICE: Loss of engine power or engine misfiring may indicate
restricted fuel filters. When the engine is misfiring or loss of power is
evident, change the primary fuel filter. Vent the fuel system and restart
the engine. If the symptoms persist, stop the engine and replace the sec-
ondary filter. Vent the system again.
The primary and final fuel filters (arrows) are the spin-on type. These
filters cannot be cleaned; replace them. Before replacing the primary
and secondary filters, drain the water and sediment from the fuel tank.
Close the fuel tank shutoff valve. Clean the area around the fuel filter
head. Unscrew the filters from the header; discard filters. Remove the O-
ring from the threaded post of each filter’s header. Thoroughly clean the
filter header gasket surface with kerosene or diesel fuel to prevent dirt or
foreign material from falling into the new filter element. Lightly coat the each new O-ring with lubricating oil. Position each
O-ring on a threaded post of the header. Fully fill the new filters with clean fuel. Apply a light coating of clean fuel oil to the
seal surface on new filters. Install the new filters and tighten then to one-half of a turn beyond gasket contact, but do not over-
tighten the filters.

FILTER, FUEL TANK

SERVICE: Located in the bottom of the fuel tank is a filter screen that
prefilters the fuel before it flows through the fuel filters. Contamination
from fuels and wax crystals can cause this screen to become clogged. If
loss of engine power is noticed and the fuel filters appear to be in good
condition, chances are that this screen is clogged.
Close the fuel tank shutoff valve. Disconnect the fuel line supply hose at
the engine filter head assembly, open the fuel tank shutoff valve and
drain the fuel into a suitable container. Completely drain the fuel tank.
Remove the hose, shutoff valve, elbow and filter screen (arrow) from the
bottom of the fuel tank. Clean the filter screen with solvent to remove
deposits. Install the filter screen, elbow, shutoff valve, and hose on the
bottom of the fuel tank. Connect the other end of the hose to the engine
filter head assembly. Fill the fuel tank. Open the fuel tank shutoff valve and inspect all connections for leaks. Correct any
leaks. In some instances it may be necessary to vent the fuel system (See “Engine Service Manual” for venting procedures).

BRAKE LININGS AND ADJUSTMENT,

PARKING
SERVICE: The parking/emergency brake assembly mounts to the rear
axle assembly. The parking/emergency brake is a spring applied,
hydraulically released mechanism. Under normal conditions, no peri-
odic adjustment is required. However if the brake should need adjust-
ment, use the following procedure: Park the grader on a level surface.
Rest the blade and all accessories solidly on the ground. Place blocks in
front of and behind each tire. Switch the parking/emergency brake to the
RELEASED position. Inspect the brake pad linings and adjustment.
With one person in the cab, have another person loosen the hex nut (1)
and turn the adjustment set screw (2) clockwise (IN) until both brake
pads (3, 4) are in solid contact with the brake disc. Turn the adjustment
set screw (2) OUT until 0.012 in. (0.305 mm) clearance between the brake pads and disc is obtained. Tighten the hex nut (1).

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-47

MAINTENANCE

BRAKE LININGS, INTERNAL WET

SERVICE: Remove the oil level elbow. Using a flashlight, look inside
the inspection hole and inspect the brake linings (right). If notches on
each side of the brake lining are not visible (view A), new brake linings
are needed.

CHAIN, TANDEM CASE

SERVICE: Inspect the chain (arrow) for wear or damage.

The chart on the next page is a troubleshooting guide for the entire tan-
dem case assembly. After opening the tandem case, inspect all internal
components.

Remark
The 830 and 850 graders have a double-strand chain as stan-
dard equipment because the standard differential is nonplan-
etray. However, with the optional planetary gearset
differential, a single-strand chain is used. The 870 grader has
the single-strand chain as standard equipment because the
planetary gearset differential is standard on the 870.

To gain access to the chain, use the following procedure:

1. Using a suitable lifting device, sling fender (1) and remove the 12
bolts and washers (2) that secure it to the tandem case (3).
2. Remove the four side access covers (4) from the tandem case (3).
3. Inspect the tandem case chain and sprockets.
4. Reinstall the four access covers.
5. Sling fender. Using a suitable lifting device, position the fenders on
the tandem case.
6. Secure the fender to the tandem case with the 12 washers and bolts.

Remark
Two access covers are on each side of the case.

3-48 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Excessive noise. Misaligned sprockets. Misalignment introduces abnormal

loading and wear. Thus, check the
alignment to maintain normal drive
conditions.

Inadequate lubrication. Improve or correct lubrication system to

insure that a proper amount of lubrica-
tion is available at the pin/bushing con-
tact areas.

Worn or incorrectly installed bearings. Replace a worn bearing or correctly

install it. A worn or correctly installed
bearing causes misalignment of the
entire drive system.

Worn chain or sprockets. Replace chain, sprocket, or both.

Obstruction in chain travel. Remove obstruction in chain path.

Tight chain joints. Remove or repair stiff links.

Heavy and pulsating load. Reduce load.

Chain drive running hot. Volume of lubricant not sufficient. Increase volume of oil to be consistent
with good maintenance practices.

Chain continually contacting an Remove obstruction and protect chain

obstruction. from unnecessary vibrations.

Chain climbing or jumping sprocket Worn chain or sprockets. Replace chain and sprockets.
teeth

Material build up in sprocket tooth Remove material buildup so that the

pockets. chain engages properly with sprocket
teeth.

Chain stiffens, starts to whip. Worn chain or sprockets. Replace chain and sprockets if needed.

One or more stiff chain joints. Remove or repair stiff links.

Link plate fails. Pulsating drive conditions can also ini- If possible, eliminate cause of pulsa-
tiate link plate failure. tions. Check for excessive slack indicat-
ing worn chain sprockets: replace if
necessary.

Worn roller link plates Drive misalignment usually causes Check the sprocket and shaft alignment
wear pattern (A). and correct, if needed.

The chain rubbing against the casting Replace the chain.

usually causes wear pattern (B).

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-49

MAINTENANCE

HYDRAULIC ACCUMULATORS
SERVICE: Check the charge pressure of the accumulators (arrows).

Remark
Refer to the shop manual for procedure.

3-50 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

6 MONTHS/1,000 HOUR SERVICE

FILTER, HYDRAULIC OIL

SERVICE: Replace the filter (arrow) after the first 50 hours for a new
machine or after a rebuild. Thereafter, replace the filter every 6 months/
1,000 hours, unless the warning indicator light justifies earlier service.

OIL CHANGE, TRANSMISSION

SERVICE: Place the transmission gear range lever in NEUTRAL and
engage the neutral lock. Place the blade in the ground and set the park-
ing brake. Oil must be at operating temperature from 200° F to 250° F
(93° C to 121° C) so that the sediment is in suspension. Turn off the
engine. Remove the drain plug (arrow) and allow the transmission fluid
to empty from the pan. Clean the screen at the end of the plug and rein-
stall it. Refill the transmission.

LUBRICANT: ATF

BREATHER, TRANSMISSION
SERVICE: Remove the breather (arrow) from the housing. Clean the
breather using a solvent-type cleaner. Reinstall the breather.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-51

MAINTENANCE

DRIVE SHAFT
(3 PLACES)

SERVICE: Purge the old grease with new.

LUBRICANT: MPG

FILTER, DIFFERENTIAL OIL

SERVICE: Replace the filter (arrow) after the first 50 hours on the new
machine or after a rebuild. And every 6 months/1000 hours thereafter,
unless the warning indicator light justifies earlier service.

ENGINE ADJUSTMENTS
SERVICE: Adjust the valve lash clearance; adjust the belt tensioner
bearing and belt tension.

Remark
See “Engine Service Manual” for servicing.

3-52 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

YEARLY/2,000 HOUR SERVICE

FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS

(WITHOUT ALL-WHEEL DRIVE)

SERVICE: Repack bearings by hand.

LUBRICANT: MPG

Remark
See the Shop Manual for servicing.

OIL CHANGE, CIRCLE-DRIVE GEAR

SERVICE: Remove the drain plug (arrow) and allow the oil to empty.
After reinstalling the plug, refill the case with fresh fluid.

Remark
Oil must not have a contaminant level higher than 1000 parti-
cles larger than 10 Micro Meters per cubic centimeter based
on ANSI B93.28-1973 Calibration Procedure.

LUBRICANT: GO

OIL CHANGE, CIRCLE-SLIP CLUTCH

(OPTION)

SERVICE: Remove the drain plug (arrow) from the bottom of the hous-
ing. Once oil is drained, position the circle assembly as described for
normal oil level check. See “Weekly/50 Hour Service” section of this
manual for the filling procedure.

LUBRICANT: HTF

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-53

MAINTENANCE

OIL CHANGE, REAR AXLE

SERVICE: Remove the drain plug (arrow) and drain the oil after the
first 100 hours on new machine or after rebuild, and every 2,000 hours
thereafter. Refill the case slowly to allow the oil to drain into all sumps.
The differential housing has three sumps connected by only a small hole.
The oil level should be to the bottom of the check hole.

LUBRICANT: HTF

STRAINER, DIFFERENTIAL OIL

SERVICE: After draining the differential oil, remove the line fitting
(arrow) the and then the strainer. After inspecting and cleaning the
strainer, reinstall it.

DRAIN, HYDRAULIC OIL TANK

SERVICE: Remove the plug (arrow) to drain the tank. Remove the
cover atop the hydraulic tank and the rear cowling. Clean the tank of
contamination. Reinstall the plug and refill the tank to the proper level.

LUBRICANT: ATF

3-54 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

OIL CHANGE, TANDEM CASES

SERVICE: Remove the drain plug (arrow) and allow the oil to empty.

LUBRICANT: HTF

BREATHERS, FRONT-WHEEL-DRIVE GEAR

CASE
SERVICE: Remove the access cover from the grader breast plate to
gain access to the breather hoses (arrows). Inspect and clean.

DRAIN, ENGINE COOLANT

SERVICE: After the engine reaches operating temperature, turn the
engine off. Remove the radiator cap. The contaminants are suspended in
the coolant when it is hot. Thus, open the radiator drain valve (arrow)
while the coolant is hot so that the contaminants drain with the coolant.
After the engine cools, flush the system with a sodium carbonate solu-
tion. Mix 1 lb. (0.5 kg) of sodium carbonate for every 6 U.S. gallons
(22.7 L) of water. Leave the radiator cap off and run the engine until the
coolant temperature is above 176° F (80° C). Drain the solution and fill
the system with clean water. Run the engine again for 5 minutes with the
coolant temperature above 176° F (80° C). Drain the water from the sys-
tem. The water must be clear while draining or repeat this step until it is.
Refill the system with the appropriate mixture of fresh antifreeze and
water. Recheck the coolant level after the engine reaches operating temperature. Install the radiator cap.

LUBRICANT: COL

Remark
Do not pour water or coolant into the cooling system when the engine is hot. The sudden temperature change
could crack the engine block.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-55

MAINTENANCE

TORQUE CONVERTER OIL COOLER

The torque converter oil cooler is an integral part of the lower radiator
tank and no cleaning of the cooler is needed. However, transmission and
converter oil temperature should not exceed 250° F (121° C). Tempera-
ture at or near this value may indicate a need for service because of
improper cooler operation or other system malfunction.

BATTERIES
SERVICE: Clean the terminals and inspect.

Remark
See “Battery Checks” In this manual for servicing.

California Proposition 65: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead, lead compounds,
and chemicals that are toxic to the human reproductive system and cause cancer. After servicing a battery,
wash your hands with soap and water.

3-56 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

STRAINERS AND FILTER, HYDRAULIC OIL

SERVICE: The hydraulic oil tank can include up to four strainers (1, 2,
3, 4). Two of them are in-tank strainers, the suction strainer (2) and
AWD strainer (3). The AWD strainer (3) is used only when the grader is
equipped with AWD. Another strainer screws into the underside of the
tank (4). The only strainer that can be serviced without draining the tank
is the one in the fuel filler neck (1).
1. Before draining the hydraulic oil tank to service the in-tank strainers
(2, 3) and the hydraulic oil strainer (4), perform the following:
• If the front tires are leaning, return them to the upright position.
• Position the front tires in the straight-ahead position.
• If the grader is articulated, position the front and rear frames
straight ahead so that the articulated angle is 0°.
• Return the drawbar side shift and blade side shift to the center
position. With the blade now at a right angle to the chassis,
lower the blade gently into the ground.
• If the grader is equipped with a ripper, raise the ripper to the
maximum height and place a block of wood under the ripper.
2. With the hydraulic oil tank drained, service the:
A. In-tank strainers (2, 3).

i. Remove the tank cover (6).

ii. Remove the suction strainer (2) and AWD strainer (3), if
equipped.

iii. Clean the strainers.

iv. Reinstall the in-tank strainers (2, 3).

v. Install a new gasket (7) before positioning the tank cover (6) on top of the tank.

B. Hydraulic oil strainer (4).

i. Remove the hydraulic line from the in-tank fitting.

ii. Unscrew the fitting from the tank to remove the strainer (4).

iii. Clean the strainer.

iv. Reverse the procedure to install.

3. Clean the strainers in solvent. That is, unless the strainers are coated with varnish. Varnish indicates the oil has lost its
ability to protect the hydraulic system. To remove the varnish, use paint thinner or acetone. After cleaning the strainers,
reinstall them.
4. To service the in-line return filter (5), unscrew it from the filter head.
A. Properly dispose of the old filter.

B. Screw a new filter onto the filter head.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-57

MAINTENANCE

BIENNIAL/2,000 HOUR SERVICE

ENGINE VIBRATION DAMPER (S6D114E-1

ENGINE ONLY)

SERVICE: Check that the index lines (A) on the damper hub (B) and
inertia member (C) align with each other. If the lines are misaligned
more than 0.0625 in. (1.588 mm), replace the damper.

Also, inspect the rubber member (insets) for deterioration. If any pieces
of rubber are missing or if the elastic member is more than 0.125 in.
(3.175 mm) below the metal surface, replace the damper.

Remark
Also, look for forward movement of the damper ring on the
hub. Replace the damper if any movement is detected. See
“Engine Service Manual” for servicing.

3-58 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

NOT SPECIFIED

RADIATOR

SERVICE: Clean and straighten the radiator fins.

FILTER, FRESH AIR INTAKE

SERVICE: Clean or replace the filter element.

FILTER, CAB RECIRCULATION

(WITH AIR CONDITIONING ONLY)

SERVICE: Clean or replace the filter element.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-59

MAINTENANCE

BREATHER, REAR AXLE

SERVICE: Clean or replace.

REPLACE THE CUTTING EDGES, REVERSE THE END BITS

Do not raise the blade too high when servicing. Do not put any part of your body under the blade when
blocking it.

Replace the cutting edges:

• When the distance from the blade holder is less than 10 mm (0.4 in.); but
• Before the cutting edges wear to the end of the blade.
If the cutting edge mounting surface is worn, recondition the moldboard before replacing the cutting edge. Build up the mount-
ing surface with weld. Then, grind the weld to the mounting surface’s original dimensions.

The cutting edges becomes sharp as they wear. Always wear gloves when servicing the cutting edges.

To change the cutting edges:

1. Raise the blade and position a block of wood under the blade rail.
This step prevents the blade from accidentally falling.
2. Remove the bolts and nuts that secure the cutting edges.
3. Remove the cutting edges from the moldboard.
4. Position the new cutting edges onto the moldboard.
5. Install the mounting bolts and nuts to secure the cutting edges in
place.
6. Torque the nuts to 191.7 lbf ft. ± 25.3 (260 Nm ± 34.3).

3-60 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE
SERV

WEAR LIMITS
Wear limits for parts considered to be normal wear items, which can be measured without dismantling the grader.

COMPONENT WEAR LIMIT

CUTTING EDGES Replaced prior to wear of the blade.

RIPPER AND SCARIFIER Replace prior to shank wear.

TEETH

PARKING BRAKE PADS Replace when the caliper pad bore seal will not seal the bore.

CIRCLE SHOES Standard Shoes: Replace when limit of adjustment can no longer be obtained. See appro-
priate shop manual for adjustment procedure.

Nylatron: Replace when 0.062 in. (1.575 mm) thick. See appropriate shop manual for
adjustment procedure.

CIRCLE GEAR TEETH Replace when 0.125 in. (3.175 mm) root, and 0.125 in. (3.175 mm) side clearance can no
longer be obtained. See appropriate shop manual for adjustment procedure.

BALL STUDS Replace when correct adjustment cannot be made by removing shims.

TIRE TREAD Tire tread depth can not be used as an indicator of tire life. See local dealer for recom-
mended tire life and tread depth for local operating conditions.

BLADE SLIDE PADS Replace at 0.125 in. (3.175 mm) thickness

BLADE BUSHING(S) Replace at 0.125 in. (3.175 mm) thickness.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-61

MAINTENANCE

FUEL, COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS ACCORDING TO AMBIENT

TEMPERATURE

PROPER SELECTION OF FUEL, COOLANT AND LUBRICANTS

It is not our policy to approve fuel, coolant and lubricants or to guarantee performance in service. The responsibility for the
quality of the fuel, coolant, and lubricant is the suppliers. When in doubt, consult your Komatsu distributor. The specified fuel,
coolant and lubricants recommended for this machine are as shown in the following table.

Other equipment may be necessary when operating the machine at temperatures below -20° C (-4° F). Therefore, consult your
Komatsu distributor for your specific needs.

Remark
Tandem drive cases are filled with HTF at the factory for graders with s/n 203590 and up. However, the tandem
cases for graders with s/n 203589 and down were filled at the factory with ATF or EO. For graders with s/n
203589 and down, drain the ATF or EO from the tandem case at the next scheduled service interval and fill it
with HTF to ensure long chain life.

API: American Petroleum Institute.

ASTM: American Society of Testing and Materials.
NLGI: National Lubricating Grease Institute.
SAE: Society of Automotive Engineers.

3-62 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

RESERVOIR FLUID AMBIENT TEMPERATURE CAPACITY

TYPE
-22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104° F S6D102E-1 S6D114E-1
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40° C Engine Engine

Engine Engine oil 16.4 L 22.4 L

4.3 gal 5.9 gal
SAE 5W-30

SAE 10W-30

SAE 15W-40

Transmission ATF 26.5 L 26.5 L

7.0 gal 7.0 gal
DEXRON III/C-4

or
Front-wheel-drive
gear 7.5 L 7.5 L
SAE 10W
Engine oil 2.0 gal 2.0 gal

Rear axle 24.6 L /6.5 gal 24.6 L /6.5 gal

HTF
Tandem drive HYDRAULIC TRANSMISSION FLUID 30.9 L /8.7 gal 30.9 L / 8.7 gal

Circle slip clutch 1.9 L / 0.5 gal 1.9 L / 0.5 gal

Circle drive gear Gear lube 2.8 L 2.8 L

0.75 gal 0.75 gal
SAE 80W-90

SAE 85W-140 or 80W-90

SAE 85W-140

Hydraulic system ATF 98.4 L 98.4 L

without 26.0 gal 26.0 gal
DEXRON III/C-4
All-wheel drive

SAE 5W-20 or SAE 5W-30

or
Hydraulic system 117.4 L 117.4 L
with 31.0 gal 31.0 gal
All-wheel-drive SAE 10W
Engine oil.

Fuel tank Diesel 346 L 346 L

fuel. 91.5 gal 91.5 gal
ASTM D975 No. 2

ASTM D975 No. 1

All lube fittings Grease Komatsu Super Grease or NLGI No.2 Multi-purpose lithium grease with 3% molybde- Fill as instructed
num disulfide

Cooling system Coolant See page 3-65 32.6 L 32.0 L

8.63 gal 8.5 gal

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-63

MAINTENANCE

ENGINE OIL SPECIFICATIONS

NORMAL OPERATION
Using quality engine oil combined with the specified oil and filter change intervals are critical factors in long engine life. The
use of a synthetic oil does not justify extended oil change intervals. Extended oil change intervals can decrease engine life
because of corrosion, deposits, and wear.

Komatsu Engine Oil or multi-viscosity engine oil meeting American Petroleum Institute (API) performance classification CF-
4, CG-4, CF-4/SG or CG-4/SH or MIL-L-2104D or E is recommended.

Remark
Classification CD, CE, CD/SF or CE/SF oils may be used in areas where CF-4, CG-4, CF-4/SG or CG-4/SH oil
is not yet available. If API classification CC or CC/CD is used, reduce the engine oil change interval by half.

A sulfated ash limit of 1.0 to 1.5 mass percent is suggested for optimum valve and piston deposit and oil consumption control.
The sulfated ash must not exceed 1.85 mass percent. The sulfated ash limit of 1.85 mass percent has been placed on all engine
lubricating oils recommended for use in the engine. Higher ash oils can cause valve and/or piston damage and lead to exces-
sive oil consumption.

The API service symbol displays the following information. The upper half of the symbol displays the appropriate oil catego-
ries; the lower half may contain words to describe oil energy conserving features. The center section identifies the SAE oil vis-
cosity grade.

Oil viscosity recommendations are as follows:

The use of a multigrade oil has been found to improve oil consumption control and easier engine cranking in cold temperatures
while maintaining lubrication at high-operating temperatures.

SAE 15W-40 multiviscosity oil is recommended for most operating climates. However, refer to the previous table for oil vis-
cosity recommendations for other operating temperature ranges.

Special "break-in" lubricating oils are not recommended for a new or rebuilt engine. Use the same type of oil during the
"break-in" as specified for normal operation.

Additional information regarding lubricating oil availability throughout the world is available in the "E.M.A. Lubricating Oils
Data Book for Automotive and Industrial Engines.” The data book may be ordered from the Engine Manufacturers Associa-
tion, 2 North La Salle St., Chicago, IL U.S.A. 60602. The telephone number is (312) 827-8700.

ARCTIC OPERATION
Arctic condition is when the ambient temperature is consistently below -25° F (-32° C). Also, if the engine is not equipped
with oil pan and block heaters and cannot be kept warm when the engine is not in operation. In Arctic conditions, use an
engine oil with a viscosity of SAE 0W-30, which is good from 32° F (0° C) to -40° F (-40° C).

3-64 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

OIL CHANGE RECOMMENDATIONS

Never mix oil with another oil having different specifications. When changing to an oil with a new specification, use the fol-
lowing procedure:
1. After the engine reaches operating temperature, remove the drain plug and completely drain the oil.
2. After draining, flushing is desirable. Clean and replace the drain plug and clean the fill plug area. Fill the engine to the
correct level with a light flushing oil. Operate the engine for a short time (5 to 10 minutes) under extremely light or no
load conditions. Drain ALL of the flushing oil from the engine while it is warm. Clean and reinstall the drain plug.
3. To refill, clean around the fill plug area and fill the unit to the correct level with new lubricant. DO NOT OVERFILL as an
excessive amount will serve no useful purpose.
4. Use the same level checks and drain intervals as outlined on the lubrication chart for new lubricant.
5. Perform an oil analysis on a regular basis. Oil analysis can help identify component failure.

Remark
Mixing the lubricants could cause damage and CANNOT BE TOLERATED. If there is any doubt whether the
engine has been filled with the old or new lubricant, drain and flush the engine (as prescribed above).

Remark
The use of a synthetic base oil does not justify extended oil change intervals. Extended oil change intervals can decrease
engine life due to factors such as corrosion, deposits, and wear.

TRANSMISSION, TORQUE CONVERTER AND OIL COOLER, TANDEM DRIVE

CASES, FRONT WHEEL DRIVE GEAR CASE, IF EQUIPPED AND HYDRAU-
LIC SYSTEM OIL SPECIFICATIONS
Komatsu Heavy Duty Transmission Fluid, Dexron III /C-4, engine oil with an API classification of CD/CC, CD or MIL-L-
2104D or E and meeting C-3, C-4 and TO-2, TO-4 and containing 0.10% zinc minimum is recommended.

REAR DRIVE AXLE/CIRCLE DRIVE BRAKE HOUSING OIL SPECIFICATIONS

Komatsu Hydraulic Transmission Fluid is recommended. It is possible to substitute engine oil SAE 30W API classification
CD or CE for axle oil, but increased brake noise may result. Durability should not be affected.

DIESEL FUEL SPECIFICATIONS

Never mix gasoline, gasohol and/or alcohol with diesel fuel. This practice creates an extreme fire hazard
and under certain conditions cause an explosion that could result in personal injury or death.
Never remove the fuel tank filler cap or refill the fuel tank while the engine is running or when hot or when
the machine is indoors. Fumes are dangerous, a spark or flame could result in a fire or explosion.

Remark
Due to the precise tolerances of diesel fuel injection systems, it is extremely important that the fuel be kept clean and free
of contaminates or water. Contaminates or water in the system can cause severe damage to both the injection pump and
nozzles.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-65

MAINTENANCE

Remark
Below -12° C (+10° F) the paraffin in ASTM Grade No. 2-D diesel fuel will change to wax particles and clog the
fuel filters. For best results use Grade No. 1-D diesel fuel in cold weather.

For normal service above -10° C (+14° F), the use of ASTM Grade No. 2-D diesel fuel with a minimum Cetane number of 40
is recommended. The use of No. 2-D diesel fuel will result in optimum engine performance under most operating conditions.
Fuels with Cetane numbers higher than 40 may be needed in high altitudes or extremely low ambient temperatures to prevent
misfires and excessive smoke.

At operating temperatures below -10° C (+14° F) or extended engine idling, use ASTM Grade No. 1-D diesel fuel. The use of
lighter fuels can reduce fuel economy.

Where a winterized blend of Grade No. 2-D and No. 1-D fuels is available, it may be substituted for Grade No. 1-D fuel. How-
ever, it is the supplier's responsibility to provide the fuel for the anticipated ambient temperature.

Use a low sulfur content fuel having a cloud point that is at least 10 degrees below the lowest expected fuel temperature. Cloud
point is the temperature at which crystals begin to form in the fuel.

The viscosity of the fuel must be kept above 1.3 cSt to provide adequate fuel system lubrication.

The equivalent grades of recognized Federal Government specifications may be used: the latest revisions of VV-F-800a.

COOLANT SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL
Selection and maintenance of the engine coolant is important to long engine life. The following information provides recom-
mendations for selecting the engine coolant and maintaining the supplemental coolant additives (SCA).

Heavy duty diesel engines require a balanced coolant mixture of water, antifreeze, and supplemental coolant additives. Supple-
mental coolant additive recommendations are on page 3-67. Drain and replace the coolant mixture every year or 2,000 hours
of operation, whichever comes first.

WATER
Use water which has a low mineral content. Water used in conjunction with antifreeze, coolant filters and inhibited water must
meet the following standards:

Total Hardness: Not to exceed 170 parts per million (10 grains/gallon maximum) to prevent scale deposits. Water containing
dissolved magnesium and calcium (the usual reason for water hardness) above the specified amount will
cause scale deposits to develop in the engine.
Chlorides: Not to exceed 40 parts per million (2.5 grains/gallon maximum) to prevent corrosion.
Sulfites: Not to exceed 100 parts per million (5.8 grains/gallon maximum) to prevent corrosion.
Dissolved Solids:Not to exceed 340 parts per million (20 grains/gallon maximum) to minimize sludge deposits,
scale deposits, corrosion or a combination of these.

If any of the above requirements cannot be met, use distilled, de-ionized, or de-mineralized water. To determine if local water
supplies meet these standards, water samples can be tested by water treatment laboratories. Softened water that is prepared
using common salt (sodium chloride) contains excessive amounts of chlorides and should not be used.

Remark
Never use just water in the cooling system because rust, scale deposits, and corrosion will occur.

3-66 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

ANTIFREEZE
Antifreeze is essential in any climate. Antifreeze broadens the operating temperature range by lowering the coolant’s freez-
ing point while raising its boiling point. In climates where the temperature is above -34° C (-30° F), use a coolant mixture that
contains 50 percent antifreeze. Do not use more than 50 percent antifreeze in the mixture, unless additional freeze protection is
required. Never use more than 68 percent antifreeze under any condition. An antifreeze concentration greater than 68% will
adversely affect freeze protection and heat transfer rates.

Ethylene glycol, low silicate antifreeze is recommended. The antifreeze should contain no more than 0.1% anhydrous alkali
metasilicate. Low silicate antifreeze is recommended to avoid the formation of silica-gel (hydro-gel). This gel formation can
occur when the cooling system contains an over concentration of high silicate antifreeze and/or supplemental coolant additive.
DO NOT use methanol or alcohol as an antifreeze because of its low boiling point.

Antifreeze formulated with methoxy propanol or propylene glycol is not recommended for this system.

Antifreeze may retain its freeze protection for more than one season, but coolant conditioners must be added to maintain cor-
rosion protection.

Remark
Do not mix different types of antifreeze solutions. Mixed solutions make it impossible to determine the protec-
tion against freezing. Antifreeze containing sealer or antileak additives should NOT be used in this system.
Sealer or antileak additives will cause plugging problems in the cooling system.

Use extreme caution when adding coolant to a hot radiator to avoid being burned. Wear gloves and gog-
gles and keep your face away from the filler neck.

Check the solution periodically and at normal operating temperature to ensure the cooling system is protected against freezing.

Remark
Do not use a 100% antifreeze to protect against freeze up. Using 100% antifreeze causes severe corrosion to
the cooling system. Use a water/antifreeze solution as described in the following table.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-67

MAINTENANCE

The following table shows the approximate percentage of antifreeze solution required for various temperatures.

Approximate Freezing Point Percentage of Antifreeze Specific Gravity at 16° C (60° F)

Concentration by Volume

0° C (+32° F) 0 1.000
-7° C (+20° F) 15 1.025
-12° C (+10° F) 25 1.040
-18° C (0° F) 33 1.053
-23° C (-10° F) 40 1.062
-29° C (-20° F) 45 1.070
-34° C (-30° F) 48 1.074
-40° C (-40° F) 53 1.080
-46° C (-50° F) 56 1.083
-51° C (-60° F) 59 1.088
-57° C (-70° F) 62 1.092
-62° C (-80° F) 65 1.095
-68° C (-90° F) 67 1.097
-69° C (-92° F) 68 1.098

In tropical climates where antifreeze availability may be limited, use a corrosion inhibitor or supplemental coolant additive
(SCA), to protect the engine cooling system.

SUPPLEMENTAL COOLANT ADDITIVES (S6D114E-1 ENGINE ONLY)

1. All supplemental cooling system additives, including those in antifreeze solutions, become depleted through normal oper-
ation. If the coolant additives in antifreeze are allowed to become depleted, the antifreeze becomes corrosive and attacks
and coats the metallic surfaces of the cooling system which reduces heat transfer. Cooling system conditioners which con-
tain these additives must be added to maintain corrosion protection.
2. SOLUBLE OIL IS NOT RECOMMENDED for use in this engine as its use will reduce heat transfer and allow internal
engine damage.
3. There are no miracle additives that will increase heat transfer or prevent overheating. Conditioned water is still the best
coolant.
4. A corrosion inhibitor/conditioner is recommended to inhibit corrosion in the cooling system for the following reasons:
• Improved compatibility with high silicate antifreezes to minimize hydro-gel formation if over concentration occurs.
• Provides engine protection in the following areas:
- Solder corrosion/bloom - Copper corrosion/erosion/stress cracking
- Oil fouling - Cylinder liner cavitation corrosion
- Aluminum cavitation corrosion - Seal and gasket degradation

Maintenance of Supplemental Coolant Additives

Keeping the engine coolant properly inhibited will keep the engine and radiator free of rust, scale deposits and corrosion.

New machines are delivered with antifreeze protection. Replace coolant filter every month or 250 hours of operation, which-
ever comes first.

Each time the coolant is drained and replaced, the coolant must be recharged with supplemental coolant additives. New cool-
ant can be correctly charged with coolant additives by using a replacement coolant filter and/or concentrate.

If coolant is added between drain intervals, additional coolant additives may be required.

3-68 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

Coolant Testing for Conditioner Concentration

When the cooling system is maintained as recommended, the conditioner concentration should be satisfactory. The SCA con-
centration must not fall below 1.0 unit per 3.8 L (1 gallon) or exceed 2 units per 3.8 L (1 gallon) of coolant. The only accurate
method for testing chemical concentrations in coolant with mixed chemical compounds is a laboratory analysis. For this rea-
son, the coolant inhibitor should be maintained once a year or 1,000 hours of operation, whichever comes first.

Remark
Inadequate concentration of the coolant additive can result in major corrosive damage to cooling system com-
ponents. An over concentration can create a gel formation that restricts or plugs passages, which causes over-
heating.

Replenishing Coolant Conditioner

Install a "precharge" coolant filter when the coolant is changed or a significant (more than 50%) coolant loss occurs. Replace
coolant filter every month or 250 hours of operation, whichever comes first. When antifreeze is added, add coolant conditioner
equal to 1.0 unit per 3.8 L (1 gallon) of antifreeze.

Remark
Mixing of DCA4 and other supplemental coolant additives is not recommended because there is currently no
test kit available to measure concentration levels with mixed chemical solutions.

Supplemental Coolant Additive Maintenance Guide

Use supplemental coolant additives (corrosion inhibitors) to protect the engine cooling system from corrosion. Antifreeze
alone does not provide enough corrosion protection for a heavy duty diesel engine. Supplemental corrosion protection must
be supplied through periodic additions of supplemental coolant additives to the coolant.

To protect against corrosion, a new coolant charge must be brought up to 0.26 SCA unit per liter [one unit per gallon] of cool-
ant (initial charge). Maintain the correct SCA concentration by changing the service coolant filter at each engine oil and filter
change interval.

Each time the coolant is drained and replace, the coolant must be recharged with supplemental coolant additives. Use the
appropriate replacement coolant filter listed in following tables. The coolant mixture must be drained and replaced as defined
under "General.”

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-69

MAINTENANCE

The amount of replacement inhibitor is determined by the length of the service interval and the cooling system capacity. Refer
to the DCA4 Unit Guide for the selection of the correct filter to replenish the SCA. If coolant is added between drain intervals,
additional SCA will be required. Check the coolant DCA concentration level anytime make up coolant is added to the system.
The SCA concentration must not fall below 0.13 units per liter or exceed 0.5 units per liter [0.5 units per gallon or exceed 2
units per gallon].

DCA4 UNIT GUIDE

Komatsu Part No. DCA4 Units

Coolant Filter
6742-01-3950 2
6742-01-3960 4
6742-01-3970 6
6742-01-3980 8
6742-01-3990 12
6742-01-4110 15
VE 3885 23

DCA4 Liquid
DCA60L 4 (1 pint)
DCA80L 1,760 (55 gallons)

DCA4 Powder
DCA95 20

DCA4 Precharge and Service Filters

System Capacity Precharge Filter Service Filter

(See NOTE 1) (See NOTE 3)
Liters Gallons

19-26 5-7 6742-01-3970 6742-01-3950

30-38 8-10 6742-01-3980 6742-01-3960
42-57 11-15 6742-01-3990 6742-01-3960
61-76 16-20 6742-01-4110 6742-01-3960
80-114 21-30 VE 3885 6742-01-3970
118-190 31-50 (See NOTE 2) 6742-01-3980

NOTE 1 - After draining and replacing the coolant, always precharge the cooling system to maintain the SCA concentration
between 1.0 and 2.0 units per 3.8 L (1 gallon). When performing service that requires draining the cooling system, discard the
coolant. Reusing coolant can introduce contaminates or over concentrated chemicals, resulting in premature failure of cooling
system components.

NOTE 2 - To precharge cooling systems larger than 114 L (30 gallon), do the following:
• Install appropriate service filter listed in the table based on cooling system capacity.
Example: 95 gallons (360 L) cooling system capacity
- 15 Units (1) Filter p/n 6742-01-4110
80 Units
• The answer represents the additional units required to precharge the cooling system. Four bottles of powder,
part number DCA95, will provide a sufficient amount of SCA units (80) to precharge the example cooling system.
• Install the appropriate service filter at the next and subsequent maintenance intervals.

NOTE 3 - Change the coolant filter at every engine oil and filter change interval to protect the cooling system.

3-70 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

Maintain a nominal SCA concentration of 1.0 unit per 3.8 L (1 gallon) of coolant in the system. Less than 0.5 units per 3.8 L (1
gallon) indicates an under concentrated coolant solution. More than 2.0 units per 3.8 L (1 gallon) indicates an over concen-
trated coolant solution.

To check the SCA concentration level, use coolant test kit, CC-2626. Instructions are included with the test kit.

SCA Unit Concentration Guide

Number of Solution A Drops to Cause Coolant Condition Action Required

Color Change

0 ~ 10 Drops Extremely under concentrated: less Initially charge the system to at least
than 0.4 SCA units per 3.8 L (1 gallon) 1.0 SCA unit per 3.8 L (1 gallon).

11 ~ 16 Drops Marginally under concentrated: 0.45 to Add SCA liquid units to maintain 1.0
0.8 SCA units per 3.8 L (1 gallon) SCA unit per 3.8 L (1 gallon) minimum
or change the DCA 4 coolant filter.

17 ~ 25 Drops Acceptable: 0.85 to 1.3 SCA units per None.

3.8 L (1 gallon)

26 ~ 35 Drops Highly acceptable: 1.35 to 2.0 SCA None.

units per 3.8 L (1 gallon)

36 ~ 55 Drops Marginally over concentrated: 2.1 to Review maintenance practice.

3.3 SCA units per 3.8 L (1 gallon)

Over 55 Drops Extremely over concentrated Drain 50% of the coolant and replace
with water-antifreeze mixture. Retest
the system for correct SCA unit concen-
tration.

Cooling System Test Kit

The following cooling system test kit may be purchased from your
Komatsu America International Company distributor.

This Fleetguard® coolant test kit, p/n CC-2626, checks the concentration
of coolant additives in the cooling system.
1. Test strip bottles
2. Solution #1 bottle
3. Small plastic container
4. Large plastic cup
5. Syringe

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-71

MAINTENANCE

CIRCLE DRIVE GEAR CASE OIL SPECIFICATIONS

Komatsu Gear Lubricant or an equivalent multipurpose gear lubricant meeting API GL-5 or MIL-L-2105C is recommended.

FUEL SYSTEM PRIMING

Controlled venting is provided at the injection pump through the fuel drain manifold. A small amount of air will enter the fuel
system when changing the filters or injection pump supply line. This air will be vented automatically, if the fuel filter is
changed in accordance with the instructions. No manual bleeding of the fuel lines is required.

1. Engine has not been started within 30 days.

2. Engine runs out of fuel.
3. Whenever the fuel filter is not filled with fuel before installation.
4. High-pressure fuel line connections are loosened or lines replaced.

To prime the fuel system, pump the button (arrow) at least six times.

3-72 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

ENGINE CRANKCASE VENTILATION

Crankcase ventilation is provided to prevent the buildup of blowby and pressure created by the heated lubricating oil.

LOCATION ON THE KOMATSU S6D102E-1 DIESEL ENGINE

Crankcase ventilation is accomplished through an external breather
located on the bottom of the push rod cover. If the crankcase shows
signs of pressurization, clean the hose and breather baffle. The breather
baffle is located behind the push rod cover.

LOCATION ON THE KOMATSU S6D114E-1 DIESEL ENGINE

Crankcase ventilation is accomplished through a vent connection
located on top of the valve cover. If the crankcase shows signs of pres-
surization, clean the hose and vent connection.

Remark
Refer to the “Engine Service Manual” for the latest service
intervals and procedures.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-73

MAINTENANCE

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
The grader is equipped with an alternator (a continuous output, diode rectified, AC generator) which differs from a DC gener-
ator. The alternator offers the advantage of being capable of a high-charging rate at low engine RPM.

The majority of the electrical circuits are protected with resettable circuit breakers, which eliminate fuses.

Remark
An in-line fuse exists in wire “19R/O” and one in wire “D-AWD.” The in-line fuses are located just below the shift
lever in the console. Only All Wheel Drive (AWD) units have wire “D-AWD.

Certain precautions must be observed when an alternator is used.

1. Always make absolutely sure the polarity is correct when installing a new battery. The grader uses a
NEGATIVE (-) GROUND system.
2. Do not short across any of the terminals of the alternator of regulator.
3. Do not attempt to polarize the alternator.
4. Always disconnect the ground cable before replacing any electrical unit in the system.
5. Never operate the alternator on an open circuit. Make sure all leads are connected and tightened
securely.
6. Diode installation: connect the dark end of the diode to the wire leading to the alternator; connect the
light end of the diode to the wire leading to the harness.

Before welding:
1. Disconnect the wiring harness from the alternator before using an electric welder anywhere on the
grader.
2. Disconnect the transmission shift lever wiring harness from the shifter (arrows) and wiring harness
from the transmission computer.

3. Ground the welder to the front or rear frame half that the repair is being made to. Do not allow the
electrical current to flow through the articulation joint bearings or any other bearings.
4. The blade is now mounted in nylon bushings, which insulate the blade from the frame.

3-74 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

RELATING TO THE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

• If the wiring gets wet or the insulation is damaged, the electric system leaks and this could result in hazardous malfunction
of the machine.
• Services relating to the electric system are:
(1) Fan belt tension.
(2) Fan belt wear/damage.
(3) Battery fluid level.
• Never remove or disassemble any electric components installed in the machine.
• Never install any electric components other than these specified by Komatsu.
• Be careful to keep the electric system free of water when washing the machine or when raining.
• When working on the seashore, carefully clean the electric system to prevent corrosion.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-75

MAINTENANCE

BATTERIES
Current production graders come from the factory with one type of battery only: Maintenance-free plus. It is available from the
factory with either 700 cold cranking amps or 950 cold cranking amps.

Batteries give off a highly flammable gas. Do not smoke or allow sparks or open flame near the batteries
because a fire or explosion could result.
Battery acid causes severe burns. Avoid contact with eyes, skin, or clothing. Wear goggles, rubber glove,
and apron. If eye contact occurs, flush with water for 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If skin
contact occurs, flush with water.
When using a booster battery and jumper cables, connect the negative (ground) cable to the machine's
frame, away from the battery. Always connect the ground cable last and disconnect it first to avoid sparks
near the battery. A spark could cause a battery explosion and injury.
Never check the battery charge by placing a metal object across the terminals. The sparks could cause a
battery explosion. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer to measure charge.
Be sure the electrical system disconnect switch is off when connecting or disconnecting batteries to mini-
mize the chance of sparks and explosion.
The engine can be started with the transmission in gear. Do not connect across the terminals on the crank-
ing motor. Attach booster batteries as directed in this manual.

MAINTENANCE-FREE PLUS BATTERY

Maintenance-free plus batteries are only maintenance-free when they are in normal service. But when operating the grader in
temperatures above 90° F (32° C) or below 30° F (-1° C), check the electrolyte level on a weekly/50 hour basis. Add distilled
water, if needed, to prevent the electrolyte from evaporating below the top of the plates.

BATTERY SPECIFICATIONS
Three specifications exist on top of the battery: Cranking Amps, Cold Cranking Amps (CCA), and Reserve Capacity (RC).

Cranking Amps: The number of amps that a new and fully charged battery can deliver for 30 seconds while maintaining at
least 7.2V (for a 12V battery) at 32° F (0° C).

Cold Cranking Amps (CCA): The number of amps that a new and fully charged battery can deliver for 30 seconds while
maintaining at least 7.2V (for a 12V battery) at 0° F (-17.8° C). As the temperature decreases, so does the number of amps the
battery can deliver. Thus, the more CCA a battery has, the easier it will be to turn the cranking motor in cold weather.

Reserve Capacity (RC): If the charging system fails, the number of minutes a battery can deliver 25 amps while maintaining
at least 10.5 V (for a 12 V battery) at 80° F (26.7° C).

3-76 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

GENERAL BATTERY MAINTENANCE

Always wear eye protection, gloves, and an apron when working with batteries.

Proper battery maintenance will assure maximum service. The following are a few simple rules:
1. Keep the battery cable terminals clean and tight.
2. Replace worn, cracked, broken or corroded cables.
3. Keep the batteries fastened securely in the frame.

Remark
Excessive tightening can warp or crack the battery case. Keep the batteries clean.

4. See appropriate section for type of battery in service for specific details.
5. When the unit will not be used for prolonged periods, remove the batteries and store them where they will not be dam-
aged. Charge the batteries once every four to six weeks so they will not go dead. Never allow the batteries to lie on con-
crete, ground, or a metal support, unless proper insulation is provided. A wooden platform or board offers good insulation.

CLEANING THE BATTERIES

A dirty battery top self-discharges the battery. Thus, if the battery top is dirty, seal the vent plugs. Clean the battery top with a
brush dipped in ammonia or baking soda-water solution. After the foaming stops, pour clean water over the battery top.
Remove the seals from the vent plugs. Remove any battery post corrosion with steel wool or a stiff brush.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-77

MAINTENANCE

TESTING MAINTENANCE-FREE BATTERIES

When a maintenance-free battery is in a deep state of discharge, it may appear to be failed, when in fact, it is good. Open cir-
cuit voltage should be checked on maintenance-free batteries upon receipt of the machine, and charged and tested as outlined
below.

1. Check battery for external damage.

2. Check the open circuit voltage with a voltmeter, as shown in chart at
right. A reading of 12.4 V indicates a 75% charge, and the battery BATTERY STATE OF CHARGE
will usually accept a charge of 5 amps or more. A reading below VOLTAGE
12.3 V indicates a state of deep discharge, and the battery appears
12.6 100%
not to take a charge. However, the battery will be taking a charge,
but the battery charger instrumentation is not calibrated to indicate 12.4 75%
the low charge rate that is being delivered.
The lower the open circuit voltage, the longer time the charger will 12.2 50%
have to be on before the battery begins to accept a measurable
12.0 25%
amount of charge.
3. Charge the battery until an open circuit voltage of 12.4V is 11.8 0%
obtained.
4. Remove the surface charge. Use a carbon pile and adjust it to draw
300 amps for 15 seconds to remove the surface charge. Or, turn the cranking motor for 15 seconds. Wait a minimum of 15
seconds and check the open circuit voltage. If voltage is below 12.4 V, reinstall the charger and repeat the procedure until
12.4 V is obtained. If after charging the battery for 12 hours and the battery still will not accept more than 2 amps, the bat-
tery has failed. Replace the battery.
5. Upon completion of Step 4, test the battery with the Electronic Battery Tester, number 15-550, or a carbon pile tester. If a
carbon pile is used, refer to the following procedure:
Load the battery to the specified amperage draw. If the voltage does not drop below 9.6 V after 15 seconds, the battery is
good. Conduct the test at an ambient temperature of 70° F (21° C).

BATTERY LOAD TEST

RESERVE CAPACITY COLD CRANKING AMPS (CCA) RATING AMPERAGE DRAW

195 950 475

170 700 350

3-78 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

BATTERY CHARGING

Do not attempt to charge a battery unless you are thoroughly familiar with the step-by-step procedure. Fol-
low the battery charger maker's instructions on the charger. If instructions are not legible and you do not
have literature with the instructions, obtain them from battery charger maker. Always wear safety glasses
when charging the battery.
Charge the battery only in a well-ventilated room. Explosive hydrogen gas is generated during battery
charging. A torch, match flame, lighted cigarette, sparks from loose connections or metal tools contacting
battery’s positive and negative terminals at the same time can ignite the hydrogen gases, causing the bat-
tery to explode.
Always turn the charger to the OFF position before connecting the leads to the battery. If you have any
doubts that the charger is OFF, disconnect it from the power source.
Never make or break a “live” circuit at the battery terminals; always turn the charger OFF before connect-
ing or removing the leads. Never touch the charger leads when the charger is ON or a spark could ignite
the explosive gases venting from the battery.
If a battery becomes HOT during charging, STOP charging the battery. Let the battery cool for 4 hours
before attempting to charge battery again.
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CHARGE A FROZEN BATTERY or the battery could explode. Allow the battery to
warm to at least 60° F (15.5° C) before attempting to charge it.

It is recommended that the filler caps, when used, remain on the battery during charging. Additionally, place a wet cloth over
the vents while charging the battery.

GENERAL CHARGING INSTRUCTIONS

Before charging the battery, clean the battery terminals, if necessary. Add distilled water to cover the plates. Near the end of
the charge, add water to fill the battery to the specified level. If the battery is extremely cold, allow the battery to warm before
adding water because the level will rise as it warms. An extremely cold battery will not accept a normal charge until it
becomes warm.

Follow the battery charger manufacturer’s instructions to charge the battery.

Connect the positive (+) charger lead to the positive battery terminal and the negative (-) lead to negative battery terminal. If
the battery is in the vehicle, connect lead to the engine block (negative battery terminal is connected to ground). "Rock" the
charger lead clamps to make certain a good connection has been made.

Turn the charger ON and slowly increase the charging rate until the recommended amperage value is reached. The charge that
the battery receives is equal to the charge rate in amperes multiplied by the time in hours. Thus, a five ampere rate applied to a
battery for 10 hours would be a 50 ampere-hour charge to the battery. To fully charge a battery, add an extra 20% charge
because the batteries are not 100% efficient on recharging. For partially discharged batteries, reduce the charging current or
charging time (ampere-hours) accordingly. For example: If the battery is 25% charged (75% discharged), reduce charging cur-
rent or time by one-fourth (1/4). If battery is 50% charged, reduce charging current or time by one-half (½). If time is avail-
able, the lower amp charging rates are recommended.

While the battery is charging, periodically measure the electrolyte temperature. If the temperature exceeds 125° F (51.6° C) or
if violent gassing or spewing of electrolyte occurs, the charging rate must be reduced or temporarily halted. This step must be
done to avoid battery damage.

Two methods of recharging a battery, the Slow Charge Method and the Fast Charge Method, are described on the next page.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-79

MAINTENANCE

SLOW CHARGE
The slow charge method uses a low amperage rate for a long time. The recommended rate of slow charge is one ampere per
positive plate per cell. If the battery has nine plates per cell, normally four of the nine will be positive plates. Therefore, the
slow charge rate would be four amperes. Charging at low amperage for 24 hours may be required to bring a battery to full
charge.

The best method of making certain a battery is fully charged, but not overcharged, is to measure the specific gravity of a cell
once per hour. The battery is fully charged when no change in specific gravity occurs over a three-hour period or when charg-
ing current stabilizes (constant voltage charger). Maintenance-free batteries must not be charged at rates greater than specified
on the individual battery charger. Peak charging voltage on maintenance-free batteries should be 16.0 V.

Charging a maintenance-free battery overnight (16 hours), requires a timer or voltage-controlled charger. If the charger does
not have such controls, use a 3-ampere rate for batteries of 80 minutes or less capacity and 5 amperes for above 80 to 125 min-
utes reserve capacity batteries. Slow charge batteries rated over 500 CCA.

Remark
Batteries stored for an extended time in a discharged condition without a recharge become sulfated. Once a battery is sul-
fated it must be recharged at a low rate to avoid overheating and excessive gassing. A sulfated battery may require two or
three days of slow charging to be fully charged. Care should be taken not to overcharge maintenance-free type batteries.
Some batteries can become so badly sulfated that they cannot be restored to a normal operating condition, regardless of
the rate of charge or the length of time of the charge. Therefore, if a battery cannot be restored to a fully charged condition
by slow charging, it should be rejected.

FAST CHARGE
The fast charge method is when the battery is charged at a high amperage rating for a short time. Limit the charging rate to 60
amperes for 12 V batteries.

Realistically, a battery cannot be fully charged with just a fast charge. A typical fast charge usually only charges the battery
from 70% to 90% of a full charge. To fully fast charge a battery, follow the fast charge with a slow charge until no change in
specific gravity occurs over a three hour period or when charging amperage stabilizes (constant voltage charger).

Never fast charge a battery when:

1. Battery electrolyte has a specific gravity of 1.225 or less.
2. Open circuit voltage is 12.4 V or above.

AFTER CHARGING
Let the battery stand 24 hours before putting the battery back into service so the voltage can stabilize. Check the electrolyte
level. If it is low, add distilled water. NEVER ADD ADDITIONAL ACID TO A BATTERY. If the battery’s open circuit
voltage does not increase after several days, replace the battery.

3-80 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

SPEEDOMETER CALIBRATION

The speedometer is calibrated to the tire size mounted on the unit. Calibrate the speedometer using the following procedure:

1. Remove the four self-tapping screws and lock washers (1) that
secure the mounting bracket (2) to the steering console (3).
2. Disconnect the terminal lead connector from the speedometer (4).

3. Remove the two nylon wing nuts (2) and the mounting bracket (3)
that secure the speedometer in place.
4. A dip switch (1) is located on the back side of the speedometer.
Adjust the eight switches of this dip switch when installing different
size tires. Adjust the dip switch according to the table below.

Remark
The dip switch is marked as to which end is the ON position.

TIRE SIZE DIP SWITCH SETTING (X = ON)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

13.0 R24 — ROLLING CIRCUMFERENCE: 154.1 in. X X X X X X

(391.41 cm)

14.0 R24 — ROLLING CIRCUMFERENCE: 162.1 in. X X X X X

(411.7 cm)

15.5 R25 — ROLLING CIRCUMFERENCE: 150.8 in. X X X X X

(383.0 cm)

17.5 R25 — ROLLING CIRCUMFERENCE: 160.0 in. X X X X X

(406.4 cm)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-81

MAINTENANCE

TIRES

TREAD DIRECTION
The direction of the tread on the front tires of an all-wheel-drive grader is different from a non-all-wheel-drive grader.

NON-ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE FRONT AXLE

The tandem drive tires’ treads must point towards the front. However, the front tires’ treads must point towards the rear, oppo-
site the direction of the tandem drive tires. Tires mounted in this fashion help prevent side slipping.

ALL-WHEEL-DRIVE (AWD) FRONT AXLE

The tandem drive tires’ treads must point towards the front. The front tires’ treads must also point towards the front. Tires
mounted in this fashion allow the treads to grip because the front axle plays an active part in producing traction.

3-82 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

RIM CENTERING
Excessive grader bounce when traveling on smooth surfaces may be caused by rims that are not centered to the wheel. A visual
inspection of the rims will determine if centering of the rims is necessary.

Whenever tires are changed, the rims should be fastened carefully to make sure that they are properly centered.
1. Make sure tires are off the ground.
2. Snugly tighten the rim clamps from the top (1), to the bottom (2), to the left (3), and then to the right (4), making certain
that the spacing between rim and wheel is equal all the way around.
3. Torque all rim clamps, front and rear tires (Refer to “Specific Bolt Torques” Section 4, for proper torque values).

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-83

MAINTENANCE

TIRE INFLATION
Nitrogen (N2) gas is recommended for inflating the tires because it does not contain any moisture. Moisture can corrode the
wheels. However, if nitrogen gas is unavailable, compressed air is acceptable.

• Never inflate a flat tire without first inspecting the tire, rim, and wheel for damage.
• Be sure all components are properly assembled. If the tire doesn’t fit to the rim, the tire or the rim is the incorrect size. Ask
a tire repair shop to inspect.
• Unmounted tires being inflated or deflated should be placed in a tire safety cage per O.S.H.A. and ISO regulations. If the
rim is not fitted normally, it may explode while inflating the tire.
• Never stand directly in front of a tire and rim assembly while inflat-
ing. Use a clip-on chuck with a hose long enough to allow the per-
son inflating the tire to stand to the side. Serious injury could result
if the tire and mounting were to separate.
• Check the tire pressure before operating the grader. Do not adjust
the tire pressure immediately after heavy-duty work or high-speed
travel. Allow the tires to cool before checking the tire pressure.
• Inflate each tire in three steps.
i. Inflate the tire to 5 PSI (0.4 kg/cm2). Inspect that no major
safety problems exist. If they do, correct them before pro-
ceeding.

ii. If no problems exist, inflate the tire to 50 PSI (3.5 kg/cm2) to ensure the bead seats properly.

iii. Finally, deflate the tire to the recommended pressure in the table below.

13:00 x 24 - 10 ply 8 in. rims 30 PSI (2.1 kg/cm2)

13:00 x 24 - 12 ply 8 in. rims 35 PSI (2.5 kg/cm2)
13:00 R24 - Radial 8 in. rims 35 - 45 PSI (2.5 - 3.2 kg/cm2)
13:00 x 24 - 10 ply 10 in. rims 30 PSI (2.1 kg/cm2)
13:00 x 24 - 12 ply 10 in. rims 35 PSI (2.5 kg/cm2)
14:00 x 24 - 10 ply 8 in. rims 30 PSI (2.1 kg/cm2)
14:00 x 24 - 12 ply 8 in. rims 35 PSI (2.5 kg/cm2)
14:00 x 24 - 10 ply 10 in. rims 30 PSI (2.1 kg/cm2)
14:00 x 24 - 12 ply 10 in. rims 35 PSI (2.5 kg/cm2)
14:00 R24 - Radial 8 in. rims 35 - 45 PSI (2.5 - 3.2 kg/cm2)
14:00 R24 - Radial 10 in. rims 35 - 45 PSI (2.5 - 3.2 kg/cm2)
17:50 x 25 - 12 ply 14 in. rims 35 PSI (2.5 kg/cm2)
17:50 R25 - Radial 14 in. rims 45 PSI (3.2 kg/cm2)

Remark
Tire inflation pressure is based on a ready-to-work machine weight with no attachments, rated payload and
average operating conditions. Pressures for each application may need to be varied from those shown and
should always be obtained from your tire supplier.Tire pressure may be increased 50% for work or travel on
paved surfaces.

3-84 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

TIRE INSPECTION
Replace a tire, if any of the following defects are found during a routine inspection:
• Tires with cuts.
• Broken or deformed bead.
• Carcass is exposed.
• Ply separation.
• Radial cracks.
• Dry rot (fine cracks on the sidewall).
• The older the tire, the more likely that it can suddenly separate during operation because of dry rot.
• Sidewall bulges or bubbles.
• Deformed or damaged tires.
• Approximately 90 to 95 percent of the original tread worn (insufficient traction to perform the work).

Improper tire handling may cause the rim to explode, caus-

ing serious injury or death.
Because maintenance, disassembly, repair, and assembly of
the tire to the rim requires special equipment and skill, have
a tire repair shop perform the work.
Do not heat or weld any rim.
Do not make a fire near the tire.

TIRE MATCHING
Unmatched tires on tandem drive will cause “pitching” or “camming,” similar to that experienced on a wavy road, tire wear,
scuffing, and unnecessary load on the final drive. Tire manufacturers recommend that tires be matched to within one-eighth
inch [1/8 in. (3.18 mm)] of the same rolling radius, or three-quarters inch [3/4 in. (19.2 mm)] of the same rolling circumfer-
ence.

Before checking the tire circumference, check that all four tires on the tandem drive are of the same size and ply rating. The
best way to measure the rolling circumference of the tires is to inflate the tires to the same pressure and carefully measure
around the outside of the tire at the center with a steel tape.

TIRE SIZES
The unit can be fitted with different size tires for various applications. When the circumference of the tires changes, the ground
speed of the grader increases or decreases. Thus, the speedometer is out of calibration. Calibrate the speedometer according
to the size of tires the unit is equipped with.
When changing tire size, recalibrate the speedometer by adjusting the settings of the dip switch on the back side of the speed-
ometer. Refer to the “Speedometer Calibration” section of the manual for the proper settings.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-85

MAINTENANCE

TURBOCHARGER

PRECAUTIONS

For certain types of engine service, remove the turbocharger air inlet hose so that the other parts are
accessible. After removing the air inlet hose, THE TURBOCHARGER IMPELLER IS EXPOSED AND CAN
CAUSE SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR ENGINE DAMAGE. Engine operation creates vacuum in the
compressor strong enough to suck objects into the impeller. It is imperative to install a safety shield on the
turbocharger inlet opening whenever the air inlet hoses are removed. Failure to follow this precaution
could result in serious injury.
Tag all controls to prevent accidental starting of the grader.

Remark
Only in extreme circumstances should an engine be run without filtered air. A safety shield is available from
your distributor. Turn off the engine before removing the air intake hose or attempting to install a safety shield.

To install the shield, remove the air intake hose. Position the shield over the air intake opening so the screen rests securely
against the edge of the opening. Position the adjustable thumb screws so the shield is firmly attached. All joints between the air
cleaner and the turbocharger and between the turbocharger and the cylinder heads must be tight. All gaskets must be in good
condition and the bolts torqued to specification.

When the service work is completed, remove the shield and store it for future use. Reinstall the air intake hose.

As a precaution against dirt getting into the engine, frequently inspect the flexible rubber hose at the turbocharger compressor
housing. If the hose shows signs of deterioration, replace it immediately.

To eliminate undue strain on the rubber hose connections, ensure that the pipes are properly aligned.

3-86 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

GENERAL TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

BOLT IDENTIFICATION
SAE

S.A.E. DESCRIPTION BOLT HEAD

GRADE MARKING

1 OR 2 NO MARKING IN THE CENTER OF THE BOLT HEAD

Low or medium carbon steel, not heat treated

5 THREE RADIAL LINES IN THE CENTER OF THE BOLT HEAD

Quenched and tempered medium carbon steel

8 SIX RADIAL LINES IN THE CENTER OF THE BOLT HEAD

Quenched and tempered special carbon or alloy steel

METRIC

GRADE DESCRIPTION BOLT HEAD

MARKING

10.9 10.9 IN THE CENTER OF THE BOLT HEAD

Quenched and tempered special carbon or alloy steel

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-87

MAINTENANCE

BOLT DIAMETER AND TORQUE

The bolt diameter is the measurement specified at (a), regardless if the
bolt is SAE or metric. The distance across the hex (b) is the wrench size.

When a specific torque is unavailable, measure the bolt diameter (a).

Determine the bolt grade. Look up the bolt diameter in for that bolt
grade to determine the general torque, with the exceptions below.
1. General bolt torques are for bolts threaded into iron or steel, NOT
into aluminum.
2. If a specified bolt torque differs from the general bolt torque, use
the specified bolt torque.

SAE BOLT TORQUE — GENERAL

BOLT DIAMETER
(in.)

NEWTON METER FOOT POUNDS

(N•m) (ft. lb.)

1/4 10.8 8
5/16 21.6 16
3/8 38.2 28
7/16 60.8 45
1/2 95.1 70
9/16 135.3 100
5/8 190.2 140
3/4 325.6 240
7/8 528.6 390
1.00 786.5 580
1 1/8 1,112.1 820
1 1/4 1,573.0 1,160
1 3/8 2,061.4 1,520
1 1/2 2,740.0 2,021
1 3/4 3,403.9 2,510
2.00 5,126.9 3,781

Bolt torques are with bolt threads lightly lubricated. Too much oil on the bolt threads can give a false torque reading, causing
the bolt to snap. STANDARD TORQUE ± 10%.

The chart provides a general bolt torque for applications using original standard bolts, nuts and washers listed in the Parts
Manual. DO NOT SUBSTITUTE HARDWARE. Most original standard bolts and nuts are Grade 8. Thread bolts and nuts
have coarse threads. The flat washers are also hardened (Rockwell "C" 38-45).

3-88 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

METRIC BOLT TORQUE — GENERAL

BOLT DIAMETER
(mm)

NEWTON METER FOOT POUNDS

(N•m) (ft. lb.)

6 9.5 7
7 16.3 12
8 23.0 17
10 46.1 34
12 81.3 60
14 122.0 90
16 203.4 150
18 271.2 200
20 393.2 290
22 528.8 390
24 677.9 500
27 989.7 730
30 1,342.6 990
33 1803.2 1,330
36 2,345.6 1,730
39 3,037.0 2,240

Bolt torques are with bolt threads lightly lubricated. Too much oil on the bolt threads can give a false torque reading, causing
the bolt to snap. STANDARD TORQUE ± 10%.

The charts provide a general bolt torque for applications using original standard bolts, nuts and washers listed in the Parts
Manual. DO NOT SUBSTITUTE HARDWARE. Most original standard bolts and nuts are Grade 10.9. Thread bolts and
nuts have coarse threads. The flat washers are also hardened (Rockwell "C" 38-45).

PHOSPHATE-COATED HARDWARE
Phosphate-coated bolts and nuts are assembled without supplemental lubrication (as received) condition. The torque charts
also apply to:
1. Phosphate-coated bolts used with phosphate-coated prevailing torque nuts (nuts with distorted threads or plastic inserts).
2. Phosphate-coated bolts used with copper-plated weld nuts.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-89

MAINTENANCE

TORQUE VALUES FOR HOSE CLAMPS

The following chart provides the tightening torques for hose clamps used in all rubber applications (radiator, air cleaner, oper-
ating lever boots, hydraulic system, etc.).

TORQUE ± 5 lbf in (0.5 N•m)

CLAMP RADIATOR, AIR HYDRAULIC

TYPE AND SIZE CLEANER, BOOTS, ETC. SYSTEM

NEWTON INCH NEWTON INCH

METERS POUNDS METERS POUNDS
(N•m) (in. lbs.) (N•m) (in. lbs.)

"T" Bolt (Any Diameter) 6.2 - 7.3 55 - 65 ------- ------

Worm Drive - 1/3/4 in. 2.3 - 3.4 20 - 30 40 - 50

Open Diameter & Under

Worm Drive - Over 1-3/4 in. 4.5 - 5.6 40 - 50 ------- ------

Open Diameter

Worm Drive - All "Ultra-Tite" 10.7 - 11.8 95 - 105 40 - 50

TORQUE VALUES FOR SPLIT FLANGE CONNECTIONS

The following chart provides the tightening torques for split flange connections used in hydraulic systems. Split flanges and
fitting shoulders should fit squarely. Install all bolts, finger tight and then torque evenly.

Remark
Over torquing the bolts will damage the flanges and/or bolts, which may cause leakage.

FLANGE BOLT BOLT TORQUE

SIZE (*) SIZE
NEWTON METERS FOOT POUNDS
(N•m) (ft. lbs.)

1/2 5/16 20.3 - 24.4 15 - 18

3/4 3/8 29.8 - 36.6 22 - 27
1.00 3/8 36.6 - 47.4 27 - 35
1-1/4 7/16 47.4 - 61.0 35 - 45
1-1/2 1/2 62.3 - 78.6 46 - 58
2.00 1/2 74.5 - 88.1 55 - 65
2-1/2 1/2 107.1 - 123.4 79 - 91
3.00 5/8 187.1 - 203.4 138 - 150
3-1/2 5/8 158.6 - 180.3 117 - 133

(*) = Inside diameter of flange on end of hydraulic tube or hose fitting.

Remark
Values stated in chart are for Standard Pressure Series (Code 61) Split Flanges.

3-90 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

TORQUE VALUES FOR HYDRAULIC TUBES AND FITTINGS

Swivel nuts swaged or brazed.

TUBE NUTS O-RING BOSS PLUGS AND SWIVEL NUTS

37° FLARED FITTING JIC - 37° SEAT

SIZE TUBING THREAD TORQUE

O.D. SIZE
MINIMUM MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM
FT. LBS. FT. LBS. N•m N•m

4 1/4 7/16-20 9 12 12.2 16.3

5 5/16 1/2-20 12 15 16.3 20.3
6 3/8 9/16-18 21 24 28.4 32.5
8 1/2 3/4-16 35 40 47.5 54.2
10 5/8 7/8-14 53 58 71.9 78.6
12 3/4 1-1/16-12 77 82 104.4 111.2
14 7/8 90 100 122.0 135.6
16 1.00 1-3/16-12 110 120 149.1 162.7
20 1-1/4 140 150 189.8 203.4
24 1-1/2 1-5/16-12 162 175 219.6 237.3
32 2.00 225 240 305.0 325.4
1-5/5-12
1-7/8-12
2-1/2-12

These torques are not recommended for tubes with wall thickness of 0.035 in. (0.889 mm) or less.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-91

MAINTENANCE

SPECIFIC BOLT TORQUES

Remark
If a bolt and nut is loose or at a torque value less than specified, replace them with new ones.

RIM TO WHEEL NUTS — FRONT AXLE ONLY

NON-AWD
(8) 5/8 in.-11 GRADE 5
115 lbf ft. (155.9 N•m)

AWD
(12) 5/8 in.-11 GRADE 5
110 lbf ft. (149.1 N•m)

RIM TO WHEEL NUTS — REAR AXLE ONLY

(32) 5/8 in.-11 GRADE 5
115 lbf ft. (155.9 N•m)

WHEEL TO AXLE NUTS

(4) 2-1/4 in.-12
1,950 lbf ft. (2,644 N•m)

3-92 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

FRONT AXLE TO FRAME PIVOT PIN CAPS

(8) 3/4 in.-10 GRADE 8
280 lbf ft. (379.6 N•m)

PLANETARY CARRIER — AWD FRONT AXLE

(16) 5/8 in.-11 GRADE 5
115 lbf ft. (155.9 N•m)

TIE ROD END NUT

(2) 7/8 in.-14 GRADE 2
170 lbf ft. (230.5 N•m)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-93

MAINTENANCE

STEERING CYLINDERS
ROD END
(2) 7/8 in. -14 GRADE 2
170 lbf ft. (230.5 N•m)

BASE END
(2) 7/8 in.-14 NUT WITH NYLON INSERT
150 lbf ft. (203.4 N•m)

STEERING YOKE TO AXLE

(2) 1-3/8 in.-12 NUT WITH NYLON INSERT
494 lbf ft. (669.8 N•m)

LEANING WHEEL CYLINDER AND TIE BAR

(3) 1-3/8 in. - 12 NUT WITH NYLON INSERT
494 lbf ft. (669.8 N•m)

3-94 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

DRAWBAR TO FRAME
(4) 7/8 in. GRADE 8
390 lbf ft. (528.8 N•m)

CIRCLE SHOE BOLTS

(12) 1 in.-8 GRADE 8
455 lbf ft. (616.9 N•m)

UPPER SLIDE WEAR-PAD BOLTS

(2) EACH END
3/4 in.-10 GRADE 8
335 lbf ft (454.2 N•m)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-95

MAINTENANCE

BLADE-SHIFT CYLINDER
(1) 1 in. - 8 NUT WITH NYLON INSERT
345 lbf ft. (467.8 N•m)

LIFT CYLINDER TO YOKE

(4 EACH SIDE) 5/8 in.-11 GRADE 8
140 lbf ft. (189.8 N•m)

YOKE TO SUSPENSION ARM

(6) 1/2 in.-13 GRADE 8
82 lbf ft. (111.2 N•m)

3-96 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

LOCK PIN CYLINDER

(4) 1/2 in.-13 GRADE 8
98 lbf ft. (132.9 N•m)

SUSPENSION ARM TO FRAME

(3 EACH SIDE) 3/4 in.-10 GRADE 8
240 lbf ft. (325.4 N•m)

SUSPENSION ARM TO LINK

3/4 in.-10 GRADE 8
240 lbf ft. (325.4 N•m)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-97

MAINTENANCE

BLADE PIVOT LOCKNUT

(2) 1-1/4 in.-12
300 lbf ft. (406.7 N•m)

BLADE PITCH PIVOT BOLT

(2) 1 in. -14 GRADE 8
225 lbf ft. (305.1 N•m)

ARTICULATION CYLINDERS
(16) 3/8 in. -16 GRADE 8
28 lbf ft. (38.0 N•m)

3-98 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

ARTICULATION JOINT
(8) 5/8 in.-11 GRADE 8
140 lbf ft. (189.8 N•m)

CAB MOUNTS
FRONT
(2) 3/4 in.-10 GRADE 8
200 lbf ft. (271.2 N•m)

REAR
(4) 1 in.-8 GRADE 8
200 lbf ft. (271.2 N•m)

REAR AXLE TO FRAME

(8) 1 in.-8 GRADE 8
580 lbf ft. (786.4 N•m)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-99

MAINTENANCE

BEARING HOUSING TO TANDEM CASE

(48) 1/2 in.-13 GRADE 8
70 lbf ft. (94.9 N•m)

TANDEM CASE TO AXLE

(8) 1/2 in.-20 GRADE 8
175 - 180 lbf ft. (237.3 - 244.0 N•m)

DRIVE SHAFT
S/N 203542 AND DOWN
except S/N 203507 through 203510.
If modified per PSN AA98012A, see S/N 203543 and UP

(8) 3/8 in.-24 GRADE 8

45 - 50 lbf ft. (61.0 - 67.8 N•m)

S/N 203543 AND UP

and S/N 203507 through 203510.

(8) 1/2 in.-20 GRADE 8

75 - 80 lbf ft. (101.7 - 108.4 N•m)

3-100 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 MAINTENANCE

PARKING BRAKE DISC TO FINAL DRIVE INPUT YOKE

(8) 3/8 in.-16 GRADE 8
45 - 50 lbf ft. (61.0 - 67.8 N•m)

PARKING BRAKE CALIPER TO MOUNTING BRACKET

(4) 1/2 in.-13 GRADE 8
100 - 110 lbf ft. (135.6 - 149.1 N•m)

REAR TRANSMISSION SUPPORT

TRANSMISSION SUPPORT-TO-FRAME
(4) 5/8 in. -11 GRADE 8
160 lbf ft. (216.9 N•m)

TRANSMISSION SUPPORT-TO-TRANSMISSION
(6) 3/4 in.-10 GRADE 8
240 lbf ft. (325.4 N•m)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 3-101

MAINTENANCE

FRONT ENGINE SUPPORT

ENGINE SUPPORT-TO-FRAME
(4) 5/8 in.-11 GRADE 8
160 lbf ft. (216.9 N•m)

ENGINE SUPPORT-TO-ENGINE
S6D102E-1 ENGINE
(1) 5/8 in.-11 GRADE 8
140 lbf ft. (189.8 N•m)

S6D114E-1 ENGINE
(2) 1/2 in.-13 GRADE 8
80 lbf ft. (108.4 N•m)

ALTERNATOR PULLEY NUT

70 - 80 lbf ft (94.9 - 108.4 N•m)

3-102 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 4SPECIFICATIONS

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 4-1

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

4-2 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SPECIFICATIONS

RIGHT HAND BIAS BLADE SUSPENSION

RIGHT HAND AND LEFT HAND BIAS

BLADE SUSPENSION

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 4-3

SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

KOMATSU S6D102E-1, 830

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-cycle diesel, turbocharged
No. of cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Piston displacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 in. 3 (5.88 L)
Bore and stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.02 x 4.72 (102 x 120 mm)
Gross horsepower* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152 @ 2,500 rpm (113 kW)
Flywheel horsepower** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144 @ 2,500 rpm (107 kW)
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .two-stage dry type
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 volts with alternator
Batteries (2) maintenance free plus (700 CCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 volts

* Gross horsepower is for an engine with only an oil pump, water pump, air cleaner, and muffler. SAE J1995.
** Net horsepower is for an engine equipped with above items plus a radiator fan and alternator (not charging).

KOMATSU S6D114E-1, 850

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-cycle diesel, turbocharged
No. of cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Piston displacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504.5 in. 3 (8.27 L)
Bore and stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.49 x 5.32 (114 x 135 mm)
Gross horsepower* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 @ 2,500 rpm (132 kW)
Flywheel horsepower** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 @ 2,500 rpm (124 kW)
Variable HP option*** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 @ 2,500 rpm (141.7 kW)
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .two-stage dry type
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 volts with alternator
Batteries (2) maintenance free plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 volts

* Gross horsepower is for an engine with only an oil pump, water pump, air cleaner, and muffler. SAE J1995.
** Net horsepower is for an engine equipped with above items plus a radiator fan and alternator (not charging).
*** The engine produces 166 net HP in first and second gears. Shifting to third through sixth gear automatically increases net
HP to 190. The increased horsepower permits higher speeds with heavy work loads while maintaining fuel economy.

4-4 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SPECIFICATIONS

KOMATSU S6D114E-1, 870

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-cycle diesel, turbocharged
No. of cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Piston displacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504.5 in. 3 (8.27 L)
Bore and stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.49 x 5.32 (114 x 135 mm)
Gross horsepower* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 @ 2,500 rpm (160 kW)
Flywheel horsepower** . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 @ 2,500 rpm (152 kW)
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .two-stage dry type
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 volts with alternator
Batteries (2) maintenance free plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 volts

* Gross horsepower is for an engine with only an oil pump, water pump, air cleaner, and muffler. SAE J1995.
** Net horsepower is for an engine equipped with above items plus a radiator fan and alternator (not charging).

TRANSMISSION AND TORQUE CONVERTER

Full powershift with integral torque converter

TRAVEL SPEEDS

850/870
FORWARD REVERSE
Gear mph km/h mph km/h
1st 0-3.0 0-4.9 0-2.5 0-4.0
2nd 0-4.6 0-7.4 0-5.8 0-9.4
3rd 0-7.0 0-11.3 0-14.6 0-23.5
4th 0-10.7 0-17.2
5th 0-17.6 0-28.4
6th 0-26.2 0-42.1

830
FORWARD REVERSE
Gear mph km/h mph km/h
1st 0-2.9 0-4.3 0-2.3 0-3.8
2nd 0-4.3 0-7.0 0-5.4 0-8.8
3rd 0-6.6 0-10.7 0-13.6 0-21.9
4th 0-10.1 0-16.2
5th 0-16.6 0-26.8
6th 0-24.8 0-39.9

CONTROLS
Load-sensing closed-center hydraulics with variable displacement pump. Short stroke/low effort direct acting control valves
with preselected maximum flow setting to each function. Double-acting antidrift check valves on blade lift, pitch, circle shift,
articulation, leaning wheels, and scarifier.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 4-5

SPECIFICATIONS

BLADE
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 in. (432 mm) radius hydraulic power shift
High carbon steel blade
830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ft. x 26 in. x 7/8 in. (3,658 x 661 x 22 mm)
850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ft. x 26 in. x 7/8 in. (3,658 x 661 x 22 mm)
870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ft. x 28 in. x 1 in. (3,658 x 711 x 25 mm)
Cutting edge thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.62 in. (16 mm)
Cutting edge bolt diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.62 in. (16 mm)
Blade base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 in. (2,489 mm)
Replaceable end bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.62 in. x 6 in. (16 x 152 mm)

BLADE RANGE
Lift above ground
830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.5 in. (495 mm)
850 and 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.5 in. (520 mm)
Pitch angle, power tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45°
Reach outside rear tires - frame straight*
830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right: 78.5 in. (1,994 mm)
left: 79.5 in. (2,019 mm)
850 and 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right: 77 in. (1,956 mm)
left: 78 in. (1,981 mm)
Reach outside rear tires - frame articulated*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right: 112 in. (2845 mm)
left: 117 in. (2972 mm)
Circle shift, hydraulic cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.6 in. (524 mm)
Blade side shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right or left: 25 in. (635 mm)
Maximum blade angle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right or left: 90°
Maximum cutting depth
830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 in. (889 mm)
850 and 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 in. (864 mm)

* For 14 ft. (4,267 mm) blade, add 12 in. (304.8 mm), right or left. For 14 ft. (4,267 mm) blade with moveable anchor, add
26.3 in. (668 mm) for the right and 24.7 in. (627 mm) for the left.

CIRCLE
Diameter - outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60.5 in. (1,537 mm)
Material, structural steel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flame-hardened teeth
Circle reversing control, hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360°, four 24 in. (609 mm) circle support shoes

DRAWBAR
Tapered 0.88 in. (22.35 mm) wall, welded box section with a replaceable ball.
Maximum width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 in. (254 mm)
Maximum height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.45 in (265.4 mm)

4-6 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SPECIFICATIONS

FRAME
Section welded unit (w x h). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.0 x 11.5 in. (330 x 229 mm)
Vertical section modulus, minimum
830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98.75 in.³ (1,619 cm³)
850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122.0 in.³ (2,000 cm³)
870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135.85 in.³ (2,227 cm³)
Weight, per foot (average)
830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210.9 lbs./ft. (313.8 kg/m)
850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241.6 lbs./ft. (359.4 kg/m)
870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295.6 lbs./ft. (439.8 kg/m)

OPERATOR’S COMPARTMENT
Pivoting control console and tilt-steering wheel. Adjustable, cloth-covered, deluxe suspension seat and backrest with swing-up
armrests and retractable seat belt.
Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.5 x 50 in. (724 x 1270 mm)

AXLE, FRONT
Oscillation, total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36°
Wheel lean angle, left or right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5°
Ground clearance @ pivot
850 and 870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2 in. (614 mm)
830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.19 in. (589 mm)
Material is solid bar construction welded steel sections.

AXLE, REAR
Full-floating type. Alloy, heat-treated steel. Differential with spiral bevel gears and NoSpin automatic lock/unlock.

TANDEM DRIVE
Oscillating welded box section, oil-tight housing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.5 x 8 in. (597 x 203 mm)
Sprocket drive chain
double strand (standard on 830 and 850) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 in. (32 mm) pitch
single strand (standard on 870, optional on 830 and 850) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.00 in. (50.8 mm) pitch

STEERING
Hydraulic power steering system, providing stopped engine steering meets SAE J53 and J1511.
Minimum turning radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 ft. 4 in. (7.4 m)
Articulation, left or right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20°

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 4-7

SPECIFICATIONS

WHEELS, FRONT AND REAR

Bearings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tapered roller
Tires, low-pressure tubeless
830 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:00 x 24-G2 10 ply rating
850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:00 x 24-G2 10 ply rating
870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14:00 x 24-G2 12 ply rating
Tire rims, demountable
830 and 850 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 in. semidrop center
870 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 in. semidrop center

BRAKES
Service brakes: Foot operated, sealed oil disc brakes, hydraulically activated on four tandem wheels.
Parking brake: Hand actuated, spring applied and hydraulically released caliper with transmission interlock.

ALL WHEEL DRIVE - OPTIONAL

A variable-displacement pump drives a hydraulic motor at each front wheel. Front and rear-wheel electronic speed sensors
automatically control front-wheel assist for all gears. Above 12 mph (19.3 km/h), a smooth transition takes place while the all-
wheel-system automatically disengages. A special circuit transfers power from a slipping front wheel to the front wheel with
traction.

INSTRUMENTATION
Hourmeter, voltmeter, fuel gauge, articulation indicator, engine oil pressure gauge.
Temperature gauges: transmission oil, engine coolant.
Warning light: parking brake, transmission filter, hydraulic filter, transmission clutch pressure, brake system.

CAPACITIES
U.S. gallons Liters
Fuel tank 90.0 340.0
Hydraulic system
w/o AWD 26.0 98.4
with AWD 31.0 117.4
Transmission 7.0 26.0
Tandem - each 8.0 30.3
Circle drive gear 0.75 2.8
AWD gear 2.0 7.6

Remark
Capacities listed are drained volumes, not after a rebuild of a part.

4-8 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 SPECIFICATIONS

OPERATING WEIGHTS - APPROXIMATE

Includes all lubricants, a full engine-cooling system, a full fuel tank, and the operator (average weight).

830
total 30,256 lbs. (13, 724 kg.)
on front wheels 8,786 lbs. (3, 985 kg.)
on rear wheels 21,470 lbs. (9,739 kg.)

850
total 32,795 lbs. (14, 875 kg.)
on front wheels 9,253 lbs. (4,197 kg.)
on rear wheels 23,542 lbs. (10,678 kg.)

870
total 34,272 lbs. (15,545 kg.)
on front wheels 9,848 lbs. (4,467 kg.)
on rear wheels 24,423 lbs. (11,078 kg.)

When equipped with AWD, add 300 lbs. (136 kg.) to the total weight.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 4-9

SPECIFICATIONS

DIMENSIONS

830 850 AND 870

* = Optional

4-10 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 5OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 5-1

OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

ALL WHEEL DRIVE

The All Wheel Drive (AWD) provides hydrostatic drive for the front wheels. Thus, traction increases to the rear drive for the
application on low coefficient surfaces or where additional directional control of the front end is needed.

AWD OPERATION
The AWD system works in all forward and reverse gears. Applying the service brakes disconnects the AWD system (no static
or dynamic braking from the front wheels). At 12 mph (19.3 km/h) in the forward direction, the AWD system also disengages.
The AWD system automatically re-engages when the forward speed drops below 10.7 mph (17.2km/h). Thus, AWD should
not be used for roading.

An engine-driven, variable displacement hydraulic pump is mounted on the transmission. This pump forces hydraulic fluid
through a flow divider, which directs the fluid to the hydraulic motors at each front wheel. Rear and front wheel speeds are
electronically monitored and compared continuously. Rear wheel speeds greater than the front wheel speeds indicates to the
controller that the rear wheels are slipping. The controller increases the pump outflow to the motors so that the front wheels do
the driving while assisting the rear wheels.

Two modes exist in AWD: normal and aggressive. In the normal mode, the front wheels do the driving only when the rear
wheels slip. Use the normal mode when driving through or plowing snow. The aggressive mode activates the front-drive
wheels, regardless if the rear wheels slip or not. Use the aggressive mode when bank sloping, moving or cutting heavy loads,
like clay or virgin ground.

OPERATIONAL CHECKS
The AWD system controller is located on the right side of the operator’s
seat. When the controller is turned on, it conducts a self-test. After per-
forming the self-test, the controller monitors AWD sensor signals.

To test the AWD electrical system, push the test button (1) and a tricolor
LED (2), which can emit one of three colors:

RED - Flashing red indicates that the controller has detected the sensor
signals from just the rear wheels. However, a red LED that is constantly
on (not flashing) indicates a failed controller.

GREEN - Flashing green indicates that the controller has detected the
sensor signals from just the front wheels.

YELLOW - Flashing yellow indicates that the controller has detected

the sensor signals from the front and rear wheels.

Refer to the shop manual for operational tests.

5-2 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

STARTING RECEPTACLE
A 24 -volt starting receptacle provides an easy way to jump start a dis-
abled grader. The starting receptacle is located on the right front side of
the hydraulic tank. Connect a mating plug, which is connected from a
good machine, to the receptacle on the disabled grader.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 5-3

OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

COLD-WEATHER STARTING AID

At 32° F (0° C), it is recommended to use ether injection to assist in starting a cold engine. At 10° F (-12° C) or below, use
ether in conjunction with engine block heaters and fuel heaters.

ETHER
The ether package consists of:
1. Cylinder
2. Cylinder clamp
3. Nylon tube
4. Fuel cylinder valve
5. Atomizer
6. Valve fitting

Remark
Improper starting fluids can cause valve seizure and severe
engine damage. Consult your distributor for the recom-
mended fluid. The ether valve inlet must be sealed against
dirt at all times. Install a dust cap on the valve or have the cyl-
inder installed.

STARTING PROCEDURES
1. The system is electrically operated.
A. Press the switch (arrow). NEVER press the switch longer than
5 seconds or the valve will be damaged.

B. After two seconds, release the switch.

C. Push the knob in, if mechanically operated. Fluid flows only

after releasing the switch.

2. After a short waiting period, engage the starter.

5-4 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Changing the container.
Periodically, remove the cylinder and apply a light coat of oil to the exposed portion of the mechanical valve shaft. If mechan-
ically operated, also lubricate the control cable.
1. Wipe dirt from the valve inlet when removing the cylinder to prevent dirt from entering the valve.
2. Loosen the nuts securing the fluid container support saddle.
3. Unscrew the cylinder from the ether starting valve and discard the cylinder in a suitable, closed refuse container.
4. Install a new valve gasket before installing a new cylinder.
5. With the cylinder removed, activate the system to distribute the lubricant.
6. Install the new container in the valve.
7. Tighten the saddle nuts to secure the container in place. Do not overtighten the nuts.

Do not smoke while installing, maintaining, or troubleshooting an ether assist start system. Ensure that
you are in a well-ventilated area and away from heat, open flames, or sparks. Wear goggles when testing to
avoid eye injury. Point the atomizer away from your body while testing. Ether is flammable and toxic. It is
harmful or fatal if swallowed. If swallowed, DO NOT induce vomiting. Call a physician immediately. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes. If fluid enters the eyes or irritates them, wash them immediately with large
quantities of clean water for 15 minutes. Contact an eye specialist. Avoid breathing in the vapors.

The contents of the cylinder is under pressure. Store the cylinder in a cool, dry place. DO NOT incinerate
or puncture the cylinder. DO NOT attempt to remove the core from the cylinder.

Inspection and cleaning

1. Disconnect the ether tube at the spray nozzle in the engine manifold. Note position of dimples on nozzle. Remove the
spray nozzle.
2. Reconnect the nozzle to the tube.
3. Turn the master switch to the ON position.
4. Direct the nozzle away from the engine and activate the ether injector.
A. No spray or dribbling indicates a blocked spray nozzle or tube. Clean or replace the nozzle, the tube, or both. When
reinstalling the nozzle, ensure that it is in its original orientation.

Spray the valve and control cable with a plastic coating, if the system will be exposed to moisture.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 5-5

OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

TROUBLESHOOTING THE ETHER SYSTEM

1. FLUID CYLINDER.
A. Check the cylinder weight. An empty cylinder weighs 16 oz. (0.476 kilograms) while a full cylinder weighs 37oz.
(1.036 kilograms).

B. Ensure that the cylinder is screwed all the way down. Always clean dirt away from the top and exterior of the valve
before removing the cylinder.

C. Ensure that only one top valve gasket is in place, or the system will not operate.

D. If after checking all system components and the system doesn’t operate, replace the cylinder.

2. ATOMIZER, TUBING, OR ELECTRIC VALVE. Atomizer or orifice clogging is the most common cause for system fail-
ure. Dirt enters through the valve while changing cylinders and ends up at the atomizers.
A. Remove the atomizer from the engine and reconnect the tubing. Activate the system.

i. If fluid doesn’t spray from the atomizer, disconnect it from the tubing. Activate the system.

ii. If fluid sprays from the tubing, replace the atomizer.

iii. If fluid doesn’t spray from the tubing, disconnect the tubing from the valve. Activate the system. If fluid now
flows from the valve, the tubing is obstructed. Replace the tubing. When replacing the tubing, always use a new
nut and sleeve assembly. Go to REASSEMBLY.

B. However, if the fluid doesn’t spray from the valve, remove the cylinder. Activate the valve. Plunger should move up
and stay up until the switch is released. If plunger operates correctly, go to REASSEMBLY. If the plunger doesn’t
respond:

i. Connect a jumper wire across the switch terminals to bypass the switch, but not longer than 5 seconds. If the
plunger now moves up, replace the switch.

ii. If bypassing the switch didn’t cause the plunger to move, check the wiring for continuity. If an open circuit is
detected, locate the open and repair it.

iii. If no problem was found with the wiring, replace the valve.

3. REASSEMBLY. After correcting the problem, reinstall the tubing and atomizer. Side orifice atomizers have a dot on their
fitting indicating the direction of the spray. Reinstall the atomizer so the spray will be against the airflow. Check that all
fittings are properly replaced and the fittings are tight.

5-6 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER

An engine block heater can be installed to heat the coolant during cold weather. The heated coolant keeps the engine oil warm,
which makes starting the engine easier. A thermostat on the inlet side of the block heater turns the heater off to prevent the
coolant from overheating. Once the coolant temperature lowers, the block heater turns on again. Although the heater is
designed for continuous overnight use, 90 percent of the maximum temperature is attained after 5 hours.

Always inspect the power cord for wear before plugging into a power source.

Ensure that your power cord can safely and efficiently carry the amperage. Failing to use a power cord with the correct gauge
wiring results in a voltage drop, reducing the block heater’s effectiveness. When the distance between the electrical outlet and
the grader is:
• less than 100 feet, use a power cord with 16 gauge wire.
• 100 feet, use a power cord with 14 gauge wire.
• 150 feet, use a power cord with 12 gauge wire.

CAPAC- AMPS @ 120 VAC

ITY
830 750 watts 6.25
850/870 1,000 watts 8.3

The above wattage ratings are good for temperatures to -20° F (-29° C). If the temperature is below -20° F (-29° C), a block
heater with a higher wattage rating is required. Accordingly, a power cord with a lower number gauge wiring is needed.

FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Mount the fire extinguisher to the warning triangle bracket mounted to the left side of the operator’s seat. Because many differ-
ent brands of fire extinguishers are available, follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 5-7

OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

HYDRAULIC ACCUMULATOR

Before servicing the accumulator, rest the blade solidly on the ground. This step ensures that cylinder drift
will not occur when servicing the accumulator.

A piston-type hydraulic accumulator is an option. It helps protect the blade assembly and related parts from impact loading in
severe working conditions or areas where extremely hard material may be encountered.

With this option, two accumulators mount to the main frame and two accumulators mount to the blade assembly. The cylinders
that mount to the blade assembly protect the circle shift cylinder because it is subjected to impact loading from both directions.
The cylinders that mount to the main frame protect the lift cylinders from impact that would cause them to retract.

Manufacturer: Parker Hannifin Corporation, Cylinder Division.

Piston type: Repairable
Oil volume: 58 in.³ (0.95 L)
Gas volume: 59.5 in.³ (0.97 L)
Operating pressure rating: 3,000 PSI (210.9 kg/cm²)
Proof pressure: 4,500 PSI (316.4 kg/cm²)
Burst pressure rating: 12,000 PSI (843.6 kg/cm²)
Length: 23.19 in. (589.026 mm)
O.D.: 2.375 in. (60.325 mm)

Remark
Precharge the accumulator to 2,400 PSI (168.7 kg/cm2) using nitrogen at 70° F (21° C). Before charging the
accumulator once it is on the grader, disconnect the hydraulic oil line to the appropriate cylinder.

5-8 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

DOZER BLADE

REMOVAL
1. Lower the blade until it is resting on the ground, which is indicated by the pointer to the decal.
2. Relieve the pressure on the hydraulic hoses.
3. Sling the front and rear of the blade on both sides. Attach the sling to a suitable lifting device.

Remark
The dozer blade weighs about 2,500 lbs. (1,133.8 kg)

4. Tag and then disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the cylinder.
5. Plug and cap the cylinder and hoses.
6. Tie the hoses to the front headlight bar.
7. Remove the six nuts, washers, and bolts that secure the front blade to the frame.

INSTALLATION
1. Attach a suitable lifting device on both sides to the rear and front of the front blade.

Remark
The dozer blade weighs about 2,500 lbs. (1,133.8 kg)

2. Secure the blade to the frame with six bolts, flat washers, and nuts.
3. Cut the tie straps holding the hoses to the headlight bar.
4. Unplug the cylinder ports. Uncap the ends of the hydraulic hoses.
5. Connect the hydraulic hoses, which were tagged during removal, to cylinders.

CHANGING THE CUTTING EDGES

1. Support the blade on blocks.
2. Remove the bolts from the cutting edge.
3. Replace the edges.
4. Install the bolts to the cutting edge.
5. Torque the bolts to 190 lbf ft. (257.6 Nm)

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 5-9

OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

SCARIFIER
The scarifier is used to loosen lightly compacted materials. Positioning the scarifier deep increases the tearing and lifting
action. To gain penetration on hard surfaces, it may be necessary to remove every other shank.

The scarifier can cut a path 46 in. (117 cm) wide.

When parking the grader, lower the scarifier to the ground.

Always raise the scarifier before moving the unit.

When placing the blade into or out of the bankslope position, lower the scarifier to prevent interference
between it and the blade.

Ensure that there is no interference between the scarifier and the fenders (if used).

Do not turn the steering wheel while using the scarifier because the scarifier teeth will break or they will
cut the front tires.

Remove and properly store the scarifier shanks when not used.

Always inspect the scarifier shanks for stress cracks and bends before using them. Never use a damaged
shank.

SCARIFIER SETUP
The scarifier is usually set up with either five shanks (left) or 11 shanks (right).

5-10 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

Insert the scarifier shank (1) into the block weldment (2). Once the
shank is in the block, engage one of three notches on the back side of the
shank into the top plate of the block. Drive a key (3) into the block,
wedging the shank into position.

Adjust the scarifier angle by selecting one of the three holes (4). Best
results are obtained with an aggressive angle for entry into the material.

Store the scarifier shanks in the rack on top of the drawbar circle. A bar
(arrow) holds the shanks in position and can be secured with nuts and
bolts.

Remark
Keep the bar secured at all times, especially when working in
the bankslope positions.

SCARIFIER TOOTH REPLACEMENT

The scarifier tooth is wedged onto the tip of the scarifier shank. To replace it, drive the old tooth off and seat a new tooth onto
the shank. Pressure exerted on the tooth during operation holds it in place.

SCARIFIER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

REMOVAL
1. Remove the scarifier shanks from the scarifier.
2. Lower the scarifier to the ground or blocks.
3. Relieve the pressure on the hydraulic hoses.
4. Sling the cylinder at both ends and attach the sling to a suitable lifting device.
5. Tag and disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the cylinder tube and elbow.
6. Plug and cap the elbow, tube, and hoses.
7. Remove the two nuts, lock washers, bolts, ball cap, and shims from the base end of the cylinder.

Remark
Keep the shims and ball cap with the cylinder base end for installation.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 5-11

OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

8. Remove the nuts, lock washers, bolts, ball cap, and shims from the piston rod.

Remark
Keep the shims and ball cap with the cylinder rod end for installation.

9. Remove the nut, bolt, and flat washers from the scarifier tilt adjustment and drawbar on each side of the unit.
10. Remove the roll pin, slotted nuts, bolts, and flat washers from the pivot holes of the scarifier and drawbar on each side of
the unit.
11. Remove the retaining ring from the right end of the shaft.

Remark
Discard the retaining ring and use a new one during installation.

12. Remove the right drawbar from the shaft. Two keys prevent the drawbar from rotating on the shaft. Remove the keys.
13. Remove the retaining ring from the left end of the shaft.

Remark
Discard the retaining ring and use a new one during installation.

14. Remove the left drawbar from the shaft.

15. Remove the two keys that prevent the drawbar from rotating on the shaft.
16. Remove the shaft from the frame.

INSTALLATION
1. Install the shaft in the frame.
2. Install the left drawbar onto the shaft.
3. Install the two keys that prevent the drawbar from rotating on the shaft.
4. Install a new retaining ring on the left end of the shaft.
5. Install the right drawbar on the shaft.
6. Install the two keys that prevent the drawbar from rotating on the shaft.
7. Install a new retaining ring on the right end of the shaft.
8. Install the bolt, flat washers, slotted nut, and roll pin in the pivot holes of the scarifier and drawbar on each side of the unit.
9. Install the bolt, flat washers, and nut in the scarifier on each side of the unit.
10. Sling the cylinder at both ends and position it against the ball studs. Attach the sling to a suitable lifting device.
11. Install the shims, ball cap, bolts, lock washers, and nuts onto the piston rod.

Remark
Reuse the shims and ball caps that were retained during removal.

12. Install the shims, ball cap, bolts, lock washers, and nuts onto the base end of the cylinder.

Remark
Reuse the shims and ball caps that were retained during removal.

13. Unplug the elbow and tube.

14. Uncap the hydraulic hose ends.
15. Connect the hydraulic hoses, which were tagged during removal, to the cylinder tube and elbow.

5-12 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

RIPPER
The ripper is designed to loosen compacted and very dense material that the scarifier cannot. When working over old oiled or
blacktop surfaces, use the ripper to completely loosen the hard surface. Positioning the ripper teeth deep increases the tearing
and lifting action. To gain the desired penetration of hard surfaces, remove every other shank.

The ripper can cut a path 84 in. (213 cm) wide.

When parking the grader, lower the ripper to the ground.

Always raise the ripper before moving the unit.

Remove and store the ripper shanks when not using them.

Always inspect the ripper shanks for stress cracks or bends before using. Never use a cracked or bent
shank.

RIPPER OR SCARIFIER SHANKS

The ripper can use either ripper shanks or scarifier shanks. Ripper shanks are stronger than scarifier shanks. But use only all
ripper shanks or all scarifier shanks at one time; do not mix ripper shanks with scarifier shanks.

USING SCARIFIER SHANKS

When doing light ripping, using scarifier shanks in the ripper instead of ripper shanks produces the best results. The ripper can
use either five scarifier shanks (left) or nine scarifier shanks (right).

USING RIPPER SHANKS

When doing heavy ripping, like blacktop or compacted stone, use ripper shanks. The ripper can use either three ripper shanks
(left) or five ripper shanks (right).

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 5-13

OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

SHANK INSTALLATION
A pin (2), bolt (3), and locknut (4) hold the ripper shank in place. The
three holes in each shank provide adjustment for the depth of the cut.

The three holes in the ripper arm (5) allow adjustment for the angle of
the cut. An aggressive point angle produces the best results.

RIPPER TOOTH REPLACEMENT

A pin (2) holds the ripper tooth (1) in place. To remove the tooth (1), use
a hammer and punch to drive the pin (2) from the shank (3). A rubber
bushing (4) is located in the pin bore. If the bushing (4) is worn, replace
it with a new one. After removing the pin (2), use a hammer to drive the
tooth (1) from the shank (3).

Install a new tooth (1) onto the shank (3). With a hammer, drive the pin
(2) into the tooth (1) and shank (3).

5-14 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

RIPPER WITH HITCH PIN

An option is the ripper with a hitch pin (arrow). It allows the grader to
pull objects. While pulling an object, the ripper position is critical so that
no undue stress is placed on the ripper or ripper cylinder.

The optimal ripper position while pulling is to have the ripper shanks in the stowed position and the ripper parallel to the
ground (left). But when speed is of the essence, raise the ripper to a 25° angle from the ground to pull another object (right).

However, under no circumstances should the ripper be in the fully raised

position while towing another object. The downward force can place
excess strain on the ripper cylinder piston nut.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 5-15

OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

RIPPER REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

REMOVAL
1. Remove the ripper shanks.
2. Lower the ripper beam to the ground or support on blocks.
3. Relieve the pressure on the hydraulic hoses.
4. Sling the front and rear of the ripper. Attach the sling to a suitable lifting device.
5. Remove the ripper from the frame.

Remark
Ripper weighs about 2,100 lbs.(952.4 kg)

6. Tag and then disconnect the hydraulic hoses from the cylinder.
7. Plug the cylinder port and cap the hydraulic hose ends.
8. Pull the hoses back through the frame and tie them out of the way.
9. Remove the 12 nuts, bolts, and flat washers that secure the ripper to the frame.

INSTALLATION
1. Sling both the rear and front of the ripper. Attach the sling to a suitable lifting device.

Remark
Ripper weighs about 2,100 lbs.(952.4 kg)

2. Position the ripper to the frame.

3. Secure the ripper to the frame with the 12 bolts, nuts, and flat washers.
4. Cut the tie straps and then push the hydraulic hoses through the frame towards the ripper.
5. Unplug the cylinder port and uncap the ends of the hydraulic hoses.
6. Connect the hydraulic hoses, which were tagged during removal, to the cylinder.

5-16 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

AM/FM/WB STEREO RADIO

An AM/FM/WB (weather band) stereo radio is combined with a digital quartz clock. The weather band is disabled when the
grader is outside the United States.

CONTROLS

CONTROLS IDENTIFIED
1. ON-OFF/VOLUME
2. BASS
3. TREBLE
4. LEFT-RIGHT BALANCE
5. FRONT-REAR BALANCE
6. BAND
7. TUNING AND AUTO SEEK
8. STATION MEMORY PRESET
9. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD)
10. CALL

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 5-17

OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

CONTROLS DEFINED
1. ON-OFF SWITCH/VOLUME CONTROL: Turning this knob clockwise turns the radio on. Further clockwise rotation
of this knob increases the radio’s volume to the desired level.
2. BASS: Pull this knob out until a click is heard. Turning the knob to the left or right changes the bass. After obtaining the
desired bass level, push the knob in.
3. TREBLE: Turn this knob to the left or right to obtain the desired treble. If the treble is set too high, undesirable electronic
background noise may be heard.
4. LEFT-RIGHT BALANCE: Turn this knob left or right to obtain the desired balance between the left and right speakers.
5. FRONT-REAR BALANCE: Rotating this knob left or right balances between the front and rear speakers. However, if
only two speakers exist, this knob is not used.
6. BAND: Pressing this button changes the radio band from FM1 to FM2 to AM to WB. The current band will be shown in
the display (9). The word STEREO should be in the display when FM1 or FM2 is selected.
7. TUNING AND AUTO SEEK:
A. Manual selection: Tap the up arrow or down arrow button until the desired frequency is obtained. Each tap of the
arrow button changes the frequency one digit.

B. Automatic selection (AUTO SEEK): Press and hold either the up arrow or down arrow button for about 0.5 seconds.
Release the arrow button and the tuner automatically seeks the next broadcasting station.

8. STATION MEMORY PRESET: Each band allows for five radio stations to be stored in memory, allowing them to be
instantly recalled for later use.
A. To store a radio frequency associated with a specific preset button:

i. Have the radio on.

ii. Select the desired band.

iii. Tune into the desired frequency.

iv. Press one of the preset buttons (8) and hold the button until the sound mutes and then comes back on. Release the
preset button. The station is now stored to memory. Depending on which button was selected, the display will
show CH1, CH2, and so on.

v. Repeat steps iii and iv for the remaining preset buttons.

vi. Select another band and repeat steps iii through v.

B. To listen to a preset frequency:

i. Turn the radio on.

ii. Select the desired band.

iii. Press the desired numbered preset button. The desired station is instantly tuned in.

Remark
Disconnecting the battery or the radio’s power erases the radio stations stored in memory. A discharged bat-
tery has the same effect.

9. LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD): Displays the band, frequency, or time. When the engine is not running but the
ignition and radio are on, the time will be displayed.
10. CALL: Pressing this button displays the time or the current radio frequency. With the radio on, pressing and then releas-
ing this button displays the time. Pressing this button two times consecutively permanently displays the radio frequency.
After selecting a radio frequency, the frequency is displayed for about 10 seconds and then the time is displayed.

5-18 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

 OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

CLOCK
SETTING THE CLOCK
Turn the ignition switch to the on position (engine not running) and ensure the radio is off. Press and hold the CALL button
(10) until the display begins to flash. Release the CALL button. Within 5 seconds of releasing the CALL button, press the
down arrow button to change the hour displayed. Immediately after setting the correct hour, press the up arrow button to
change the minutes displayed. After the correct time is set, wait 5 seconds for the flashing to stop. The clock will now begin
keeping time.

Remark
Disconnecting the battery or the radio’s power loses the time setting. A discharged battery has the same effect.

830B,C 850B,C 870B,C 5-19

OPTIONS, ATTACHMENTS

5-20 830B,C 850B,C 870B,C

Komatsu America Corp.
Data Kom Publications & Training PROPOSAL FOR MANUAL OR CSS REVISION
440 North Fairway Drive
Vernon Hills, Il. 60061-8112 U.S.A.
Attn: Service Publications
Fax No. (847)-970-4186

DATE: FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY -- No.PMR

NAME OF COMPANY: CITY:

PROPOSER

STATE OR PROVINCE:

DEPARTMENT: COUNTRY:

NAME: FAX:

MANUAL DESCRIPTION: CSS PROGRAM - e.g: Lookup, Parts or Service

MANUAL OR CSS CD NO: CSS PROGRAM RELEASE VERSION:

MANUAL OR CSS CD ISSUE DATE: CSS BOOK PUBLISHER:

BOOK DESCRIPTION
MACHINE MODEL & S/N:

MANUAL SECTION/PAGE NUMBERS OR CSS REFERENCE & PAGE NUMBERS

PROBLEM:

Attach photos or sketches.

If more space is needed, use another sheet.

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY

CORRECTIVE ACTION:

PROPFREV.FM 100903